Home

to view the Anritsu 69367B datasheet.

1. m 8003 SCALAR 693XXB Y SIGNAL GENERATOR NETWORK ANALYZER To DUT H SENSOR Figure 7 4 693XXB to 8003 SNA Connections Connecting Connect the 693XXB signal generator to the 8003 the 693XXB to scalar network analyzer as shown in Figure 7 4 the 8003 7 16 Step 1 Connect one end of a GPIB cable to the 693XXB rear panel IEEE 488 GPIB con nector Connect the other end of the cable tothe 8003 rear panel GPIB PRIVATE connector Step2 Connect the special AUX I O interface ca ble Anritsu Part No 806 90 to the 693XXB rear panel AUX I O connector Connect the cable end having BNC con nectors as follows a Connect the cable end labeled SEQ SY NC to the 8003 rear panel BLANK ING INPUT connector 693XXB OM USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS 693XXB OM Setting Up the 693XXB USE WITH A 8003 SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER b Connect the cable end labeled HORIZ OUT to the 8003 rear panel SWEEP IN connector Step 3 Connect one end of a coaxial cable having BNC connectors to the 693XXB rear panel PULSE TRIGGER IN connector Connect the other end of the cable to the 8003 rear panel AC MOD OUT connector The 693XXB must be in the 8003 Scalar GPIB mode of operation in order to operate as a signal source for the SNA The following pa
2. m om a um Em o DOO e um RF 5 OUTPUT INPUT SWITCH MATRIX AMPLIFIERS COUPLERS ETC T FLATNESS CORRECTED OUTPUT DEVICE UNDER Ai p _ E TEST POWER SENSOR Figure3 4 Setup for Creating a Power Offse Table User Levd Flatness Correction 693XXB OM 3 67 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 68 LEVELING OPERATIONS Equipment Setup To create a power offset table for user level flatness correction connect the equipment shown in Figure 3 4 as follows Step 1 Using a GPIB cable connect the Power Meter to the 693XXB Step 2 Calibrate the Power Meter with the Power Sensor Step 3 Connect the Power Sensor to the point in the test setup where the corrected power level is desired Power Meter Model and GPIB Address n order for the 693XXB to control the power meter the GPIB address and power meter model must be selected from the Configure GPIB menu Press to go to the System Menu display At the System Menu display press Config The System Configuration Menu below is displayed 8 88 dBm EE Puc Se Next press GPIB The Configure GPIB menu below is displayed Terminator eve Hode m Config GPIE L GPI
3. FM Frequency Range Multipliers band frequency The message Reduce Rate appears Frequency Range Multiplier at the bottom of the FM status display w Option 21B Digital Down Converter 10 15 625 MHz 256 2 The internal FM actual deviation is set for gt 20 MHz or 15 625 31 25 MHz 128 i es Hie ct or Mod Index in Locked mode gt z in Un 31 25 62 5 MHz 64 locked Narrow mode or gt 100 MHz in Unlocked Wide 62 5 125 MHz 32 as And 125 250 MHz 16 mode Actual Deviation internal Set Deviation x Multi plier and Mod Index Actual Deviation in MHz Rate 250 lt 500 MHz 8 The message Reduce Deviation appears at the bot 500 1050 MHz 4 tom of the FM status display 1050 2200 MHz 2 Units w o Option21B 3 The external FM modulating signal exceeds the input 10 MHz 2 GHz 1 voltage range gt 1 15V or lt 1 15 The message Re 2 GHz 2 2 GHz w Option 1 duce FM Input Level appears at the bottom of the 21B 20 GHz status display 20 GHz 40 GHz 0 5 40 GHz 65 GHz 0 25 4 The external FM actual deviation is set for gt 20 MHz in Locked Low Noise mode Locked mode or Unlocked Narrow mode or gt 100 MHz in Unlocked Wide mode Actual Deviation external Set Sensitivity x Peak Input Voltage x Multiplier The message Reduce Deviation appears at the bottom of the FM status display 693XXB OM 6 9 OPERATOR ERROR AND WARN
4. IEEE 488 INTERFACE GPIB mm aS o mimm fA LL OO oo 00 9 5 E 693XXB Y HP8757 SCALAR SIGNAL GENERATOR To DUT NETWORK ANALYZER To DUT 4 3d SENSOR Figure 7 5 693XXB to HP8757D SNA Connections Connecting the 693XXB to the HP8757D 7 20 Connect the 693XXB signal generator to the HP8757D scalar network analyzer as shown in Fig ure 7 5 Connect one end of a GPIB cabletothe 693XXB rear panel IEEE 488 GPIB con nector Connect the other end to the HP8757D rear panel 8757 SYSTEM INTERFACE connector Step 1 Step2 Connect one end of a coaxial cable having BNC connectors to the 693XXB rear panel PULSE TRIGGER IN connector Connect the other end of the cabletothe HP8757D rear panel MODULATOR DRIVE connector 693XXB OM USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS 693XXB OM Setting Up the 693XXB USE WITH A HP8757D SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER Step3 Connect the special AUX I O interface cable Anritsu Part No 806 90 tothe 693XXB rear panel AUX I O connector Connect the cable end having BNC con nectors as follows a Connect the cable end labeled SEQ SYNC tothe HP8757D rear panel POS Z BLANK connector b Connect the cable end labeled SWP DWELL IN tothe HP 8757D rear panel STOP SWEEP connector c Connect the cable end labeled HORIZ OUT to the HP8757D rear panel SWEEP IN 0 10V connector The 693XXB must be se
5. 6 3 6 2 ERROR AND WARNING STATUS MESSAGES 6 3 Self Test Error Messages 6 3 Normal Operation Error and Warning Status lt 6 8 6 3 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 13 6 4 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 6 16 Cleaning the Fan Filter 6 16 Cleaning the Data Display 6 16 Replacing the Line Fuse 6 17 6 1 6 2 INTRODUCTION ERROR AND WARNING STATUS MESSAGES 693XXB OM Chapter 6 Operator Maintenance This chapter provides the information necessary for operator mainte nance of the signal generator Operator maintenance is limited to troubleshooting and repairs that can be made without removing the instrument covers During normal operation the 693XXB generates error messages to in dicate internal malfunctions abnormal signal generator operations or invalid signal inputs or data entries It also displays warning mes sages to alert the operator to conditions that could result in inaccurate signal generator output In addition status messages are displayed to remind the operator of current menu selections or settings Self Test The 693XXB firmware includes internal diagnostics Error that self test the instrument These self test diag Messages nostics perform a brief go no go test of most of the instrument PCBs and other internal assemblies CAUTION During self test with RF OUTPUT set to
6. EEG 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 PIN SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 4 DIO 1 thru DIO 4 Data Input Output Bits are HIGH when the data is logical 0 and LOW when the data is logical 1 5 EOI End or Identify A low true state indicates that the last byte of a multibyte mes sage has been placed on the line 6 DAV Data Valid A low true state indicates that the active talker has 1 sensed that NRFD is high false and NDAC is low true 2 placed the data byte on the bus and 3 waited an appropriate length of time for the data to settle 7 NRFD Not Ready For Data A high false state indicates that all active listeners are ready to accept new data 8 NDAC Not Data Accepted A low true state indicates that all addressed listeners have accepted the current data byte for internal processing 9 IFC Interface Clear low true state places all bus instruments in a known quiescent state unaddressed to talk unaddressed to listen and service request idle 10 SRQ Service Request A low true state indicates that a bus instrument desires the im mediate attention of the controller 11 ATN Attention A low true state indicates that the bus is in the command mode data lines are carrying bus commands A high false state indicates that the bus is in the data mode data lines are carrying device dependent instructions or data 12 Shield Cha
7. Frequency Range Divide Ratio n 10 MHz to 15 625 MHz 256 515 625 MHz to 31 25 MHz 128 31 25 MHz to 62 5 MHz 64 62 5 MHz to 125 MHz 32 gt 125 MHz to lt 250 MHz 16 gt 250 MHz to lt 500 MHz gt 500 MHz to lt 1050 MHz gt 1050 MHz to lt 2200 MHz 2 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS PULSE MODULATION Pulse modulation specifications apply at maximum rated power unless otherwise noted On Off Ratio gt 80 dB Rise Fall Time 10 to 90 100 kHz to 1 0 GHz 15 ns 10 ns typical 1 0 GHz to 8 0 GHz 10 ns 5 ns typical Minimum Leveled Pulse Width 100 ns 22 GHz 1 us 2 GHz Minimum Unleveled Pulse Width lt 10 ns Pulse Overshoot lt 10 Level Accuracy Relative to CW 100 Hz to 1 MHz PRF 0 5 dB 1 us pulse width 1 0 dB lt 1 us pulse width Video Feedthrough lt 10 mV 2 GHz Pulse Width Compression lt 8 ns typical Pulse Delay typical External 50 ns Triggered 100 ns Triggered with Delay 200 ns PRF Range DC to 10 MHz unleveled 100 Hz to 5 MHz leveled External Input Front or rear panel BNC selectable from modulation menu Drive Level TTL compatible input Input Logic Positive true or negative true selectable from modulation menu INTERNAL PULSE GENERATOR Modes Free run triggered gated delayed doublet triplet quadruplet All modes selectable from modulation menus Clock Rate Selectable Parameter 40 MHz 10 MHz Pulse Width 25 ns to 419 ms
8. sine wave square wave Ava positive ramp NIN negative ramp GN Gaussian noise UN uniform noise N triangle wave 693XXB OM SIGNAL MODULATION Press Mod Wave to to the Modulation Wave form Selection Menu below p um Hat Gaa B KHz Rat 18 668 B js This menu displays the modulation waveforms on the left that are available from the FM generator Use the cursor control key to highlight the desired modulation waveform then press Select to select it The FM Status display will reflect your selection Press Previous Menu to return to the main FM Status Menu display External FM Source To provide frequency modulation of the output signal using a modulating signal from an external source first set up the external signal generator and connect it to either the 693XXB front or rear panel FM IN connector Next gotothe additional FM Status Menu page 3 79 and press Int Ext to select the external source for the modulating signal The External FM Status Menu below is then displayed z E a Sure FM Mode Unlocked Harrow Deuiation This menu contains the external FM status window that shows the current menu selections and the measured FM Deviation The FM deviation meas urement function measures the voltage of the exter nal modulation signal and calculates the peak frequency deviation The menu lets you perform the following 3 81
9. This menu lets you perform the following a Turn the alternate sweep mode on off Gotothe alternate range menu to select a sweep range for the alternate sweep Gotothe alternate level menu to select a power level for the alternate sweep Activating the Alternate Sweep The Alternate Sweep menu soft key Alt Sweep tog gles the alternate sweep mode on and off Press Alt Sweep toturn on the alternate sweep mode Notice that the Alternate Sweep menu on the following page changes to show that the alter nate sweep is now active 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION 1 0 66 dBm L2 1 606 dBm Now press Previous Menu to return tothe Step Sweep Menu display or the Analog Sweep M enu display if operating in analog sweep frequency mode Notice the changes to the Step Sweep Menu display below These changes indicate that the alternate sweep frequency mode is active Level Li 6 dEm L2 1 56 dEm Now press Alt Swp Menu to return to the Alternate Sweep menu Selecting an Alternate Sweep Range To go to the Alternate Range menu below from the Alternate Sweep menu press Alt Range o F1 2 888 GHz F3 2 888 GHz F2 26 850 F4 5 888 F4 Leve Li d Lz 1 68 dEm E Eee E Uf Off S ore Select the alternate sweep range Full F1 F2 4 F5 dF or F6 dF The menu th
10. 3 29 Selecting Step Sweep Mode 3 29 Setting Step Size Dwell Time and Sweep Time 3 29 Manual SweepMode 3 32 Selecting Manual Sweep Mode 3 32 Selecting a SweepRange 3 33 Selecting Power Level 3 35 Frequency Markers 3 36 Selecting Alternate Sweep Mode 3 38 List Sweep 3 41 Selecting List Sweep Mode 3 42 Editing the List 3 43 Selecting a List Sweep Range 3 46 Selecting List Sweep Trigger 3 47 FIXED POWER LEVEL OPERATION 3 49 Selecting Fixed Power Level Mode 3 49 Selecting Power Level 3 49 Level Offset 3 52 POWER LEVEL SWEEP OPERATION 3 53 Selecting CW Power Sweep Mode 3 53 Setting CW Power Sweep Step Size and 3 54 Selecting CW Power Sweep Trigger 3 55 Selecting a Power Level Sweep Range 3 56 Selecting a Sweep Frequency Step Power Mode 3 58 Setting Power Level Step Size 3 59 LEVELING OPERATIONS 2 2 2 xm om 3 60 Selecting Leveling Mode 3 60 Attenuator Decoupling a aa 3 64 ALC 3 65 User Cal User Level Flatness Correction 3 67 693XXB OM Table of Contents Continued 3 12 3 13 3
11. TSO ALC ModeyALt LoodUser Cal Menu Display with ALC Loop Selected Edit Start Frequency Edit End Frequency memo Edit Number Of Points Status 0ff Selected Offset Table On Off FM Starts Calibration To Create Offset Table Menu Display with User Cal Selected Figure 4 10 Leveling Modes Menu Map 4 14 ALC Modd ALC Loop LEVELING MODES Selects Internal ALC Default Mode Internal Selects External ALC External Detector Input Selects External ALC Power Meter Input L Selects ALC Off Edit Current Power Level Decouple The Attenuator he ALC Level Press To Increase Attenuation 10dB Steps FL Press To Decrease Attenuation 10dB Steps NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 paragraph 3 11 for Leveling Modes operating instruc tions 693XXB OM LOCAL OPERATION MENU MAPS 693XXB OM NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 paragraph 3 12 for AM Mode operating instructions AMPLITUDE MODULATION MODE CWISWEEP SELECT FREQUENCY CONTROL LEVEL ALC SELECT LEVEL CONTROL MODULATION m AM EX cat AM On Off Edit AM Depth Edit AM Rate Select Modulation Waveform Internal AM Source or External AM Source 5 AM n IN Log AM 0 25dB V Linear AM 0 100 V EXTERNAL AM SOURCE SELECTED CWISWEEP SELECT FREQUENCY CONTROL
12. During power up the message Please Wait LOADING PROGRAMS appears on the data display When all programs have been loaded the start up screen below is displayed It provides you with the model number of the signal generator and the revi sion level of the installed firmware Anritsu BOSHAB High Performance Signal Generator Firmware Wersion COPYRIGHT i238 Anritsu Ca The 693XXB then returns to the exact configuration it was in when last turned off Whenever the signal generator is not being used it should be left connected to the power source and placed in standby Standby operation provides power to keep the internal time base at operating temperature This assures specified frequency accu racy and stability when the 693XXB is placed in operation NOTE During standby operation the fan runs continuously Press LINE to switch the unit from OPERATE green LED on to STANDBY orange LED on NOTE When switching to operate from standby allow at least a 30 minute warmup before beginning 693XXB operations 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Self Testing the 693XXB INSTRUMENT START UP The 693XXB firmware includes internal diagnostics that self test the instrument These self test di ag nostics perform a brief go no go test of most of the PCBs and other internal assemblies If the signal generator fails self test an error message is dis played on the data display Error messages an
13. Edit End Power Level ENS Edit Dwell Time SELECT Edit Step Size CH m On Off E Edit Number of Steps On Off i On Off Horr E Of FETS Edit Start Power Level Edit End Power Level brads gt us Refer to Chapter 3 paragraph 3 10 Log dBm or Linear mV for CW Power Sweep M ode operating Power Sweep 2 instructions Figure 4 8 CW Power Sweep Mode Menu Map 4 12 693XXB OM LOCAL OPERATION MENU MAPS 693XXB OM SWEEP FREQUENCY STEP POWER MODE SELECT CONTROL L2 LEVEL ALC m Step Swe p mmm E i Edit Step Size MODULATION zLevel St Edit Number of Steps N A pues i EN 1 2 00 Li Edit Start Power Level Fe 20 009 HOO dit Edit End Power Level LEVEL ALC SELECT Swe gt BE Log dBm or Linear mV Power Sweep MODULATION SYSTEM NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 paragraph 3 10 for Sweep F requency Step Power Mode operating instructions Figure 4 9 Sweep Frequency Step Power Mode Menu Map 4 13 LOCAL OPERATION MENU MAPS CWISWEEP SELECT FREQUENCY CONTROL Selects Front Panel External ALC Input Selects Rear Panel External ALC Input CWISWEEP SELECT ALC Slope On Off Edit The ALC Slope Adjust the External ALC LEVEL CONTROL Edit The Pivot Point HR
14. Model 69387B Serial No Date Model 69387B with Option 2D Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 5 0 GHz CW Frequency 25 0 GHz CW Frequency 50 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 8 5 dBm dBm 0dBm dBm 1 5 dBm dBm 7 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 2 5 dBm dBm 6 5 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 3 5 dBm dBm 5 5 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 4 5 dBm dBm 4 4 5 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 5 5 dBm dBm 3 5 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 6 5 dBm dBm 2 5 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 7 5 dBm dBm 1 5 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 8 5 dBm dBm 4 0 5 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 9 5 dBm dBm 0 5 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 10 5 dBm dBm 1 5 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 11 5 dBm dBm 2 5 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 12 5 dBm dBm 3 5 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 13 5 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 5 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 2 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB 0 01 to 40 GHz 2 2 dB 40 to 60 GHz Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 2 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB 0 01 to 20 GHz 8 2 dB 20 to 40 GHz 10 2 dB 40 to 60 GHz typical not a specification 5 44 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5
15. This menu contains the internal pulse status win dow that shows the current menu selections This menu lets you perform the following Q Turn pulse modulation on and off Set the pulse period or PRF Set the pulse widths W1 W4 and delays D1 D4 in Single Doublet Triplet and Quad ruplet pulse modes Set the parameters for the Step Delay mode Q Gotoan additional Internal Pulse Status menu to select the pulse mode trigger mode and pulse configuration Press Off to turn pulse modulation on and off The Internal Pulse status display will reflect your selection as On or Off Press Edit Period to open the Pulse Period parame ter If you had selected PRF instead of Period at the Internal Pulse Configuration menu the soft key would read Edit PRF and pressing it would open the Pulse PRF parameter Edit the current value using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the keypad and the appro priate terminator key To dose the Pulse Period pa rameter press Edit Period or make another menu selection Press W D List to display the list of current Pulse Width W1 W4 and Delay D1 D4 parameter set tings To change the current value of a parameter use the cursor control key to select the parameter 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Pulse Delay D1 is only active when Delayed Triggered w delay or Compositetriggering mode is se lected
16. 100 ns to 1 6s Pulse Period Variable Delay 250 ns to 419 ms 600 ns to 1 6s Single 0 to 419 ms 0 to 1 6s Doublet 100 ns to 419 ms 300 ns to 1 6s Triplet 100 ns to 419 ms 300 ns to 1 6s Quadruplet 100 ns to 419 ms 300 ns to 1 6s Resolution 25 ns 100 ns Accuracy 10 ns 5 ns typical Output Video pulse and sync out rear panel BNC con nectors A For 50 GHz 60 GHz and 65 GHz units when operating above 40 GHz pulse overshoot is lt 20 typical at rated power Period must be at least 5 clock cycles longer than pulse widths delays B 10 Units with Option 21B Digital Down Converter At frequecies from 10 MHz to lt 2 2 GHz the following pulse modulation specifications apply Above 2 2 GHz the pulse modulation specifications in the left column apply Pulse modulation specifications apply at maximum rated power On Off Ratio gt 80 dB Rise Fall Time 10 to 90 10 MHz to lt 31 25 MHz lt 400 ns typical gt 31 25 MHz to lt 125 MHz lt 90 ns typical gt 125 Mhz to lt 500 MHz lt 33 ns typical gt 500 MHz to lt 2 2 GHz 15 ns typical Minimum Leveled Pulse Width lt 1 us Pulse Overshoot 10 MHz to lt 31 25 MHz lt 33 typical gt 31 25 MHz to lt 125 MHz lt 22 typical gt 125 Mhz to lt 500 MHz lt 11 typical gt 500 MHz to lt 2 2 GHz lt 10 typical Level Accuracy Relative to CW 100 Hz to 500 kHz PRF 0 5 dB Video Feedthrough 10 MHz to lt 31 25 MHz lt 70 mV
17. HE Langage Hat ive Press Native SCPI to select the external interface language to be used This menu soft key toggles the language selection between Native and SCPI The current selection appears on the display 2 9 RACK MOUNTING KIT INSTALLATION INSTALLATION 2 5 RACK MOUNTING KIT The rack mounting kit Option 1 contains a set of track slides 90 tilt INSTALLATION capability mounting ears and front panel handles for mounting the signal generator in a standard equipment rack The following proce dure provides instructions for installing the rack mounting hardware on to the instrument Refer to Figures 2 2 and 2 3 during this proce dure Preliminary Disconnect the power cord and any other cables from the instrument Procedure Install the rack mounting hardware as follows Step 1 Using a Phillips screwdriver remove the screws and the front handle assemblies from the instrument F or instruments not having front handles remove the screws and the front top and bottom feet from the instrument Retain the screws Step 2 Removethe four feet from the rear of the instrument Retain the screws Step 3 Removethescrews and the carrying han dle from the side handle cover The two screws fastening the carrying handle through the side handle cover to the chas sis are accessable by lifting up the rubber covering at each end of the handle P RO 7 mss Rear Feet 4 f fff 2 07
18. Indicates either a calibration related problem or a defective 10 Volt reference Do not Attempt to Operate Refer the instrument to a qualified service technician Error 102 DVM Negative 10V Reference Indicates either a calibration related problem or a defective 10 Volt reference Do not Attempt to Operate Refer the instrument to a qualified service technician Error 105 Power Supply Voltage s out of Regulation Indicates one or more of the voltages from the power supply are out of regulation Do Not Attempt to Operate Refer the instrument to a qualified service technician Error 106 Power Supply not Locked Indicates the power supply is not phase locked to the 400 kHz reference frequency The 693XXB is still operable in a degraded mode The RF output may contain more spurious signals than normal Error 107 Sweep Time Check Failed Indicates the sweep timing is out of tolerance or has failed If analog sweeps can be obtained the 693XXB is still operable in a degraded mode If analog sweeps can not be obtained the 693XXB is operable only in CW or step sweep frequency modes Error 108 Crystal Oven Cold Indicates the 100 MHz crystal oven or the Option 16 high stability 10 MHz crystal oscillator has not reached operating temperature The 693XXB is still operable but frequency accuracy and stability may be degraded Error 109 The 100MHz Reference is not Locked to the External Reference Indicates
19. NOTE Delete entry cannot be undone Oncea list index is deleted the only recovery is to re enter the deleted frequency and power level Press Previous Menu to return to the main Edit List menu 3 45 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 46 Selecting a List Sweep Range SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION Copying Data from the CW Menu An easy method of entering frequency and power level information into the current list index is to copy the data from the CW menu First go tothe main List Sweep menu and press the List Index soft key to open the list index parameter Then select the list index that you want the data to be added to Next press the CW soft key at the bottom of the Mia The CW menu below is displayed B n dEn Ed FM H Use the Edit Fi and Edit soft keys to set the frequency and power level to the values you wish to enter into the current list index Press the to List soft key to copy the data to the current list index Once the frequency and power level information has been entered into the current list index the list in dex is incremented by one Selecting a Sweep Range involves choosing a start index and a stop index for the list sweep To goto the Sweep menu below from the main List cdd menu press Menu This menu lets you select list sweep range set the dwell time per step and go to the trigger menu 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY PA
20. key FREQUENCY CONTROL The Sweep Frequency Control menu below is dis played Li 8 06 dB NEN HT This menu lets you perform the following Select a full range sweep F min F max or of the preset sweep ranges for the sweep fre quency mode Select the frequency parameters for each pre set sweep range Select an output power level for the sweep Gotothe marker list menu only availablein analog and step sweep frequency modes 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY PANEL OPERATION OPERATION Setting a Preset Sweep Range At the menu select the sweep range F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 dF or F6 dF that you wish to set The menu then displays the current frequency parameters for the selected sweep range Now use the menu edit soft keys to open the frequency parameters for editing Edit the current frequency parameters or enter new frequency parameter values for the sweep range To close the open frequency parameter when you are finished press its menu edit soft key or make an other menu selection You can set all the preset sweep ranges in this man ner Selecting a Whilein a sweep frequency mode you can edit the Power Level current output power level or enter a new output power level for the frequency sweep Editing the Current Power Level Press Edit open the power level parameter then edit the current power level using the cursor control key or rotary data knob To close the ope
21. 125 MHz w Option 21B 83 113 133 135 133 144 5125 MHz to 250 MHz w Option 21B 77 107 130 132 130 143 2250 MHz to 500 MHz w Option 21B 71 101 125 128 124 142 2500 MHz to 1050 MHz w Option 21B 65 95 119 122 119 138 51050 MHz to 2200 MHz w Option 21B 59 89 113 116 113 135 gt 10 MHz to 2 0 GHz 57 83 100 102 102 111 gt 2 0 GHz 2 2 GHz w Option _ _ _ E 21B to 6 0 GHz 50 80 107 110 107 130 6 0 GHz to 10 0 GHz 45 75 104 107 107 128 210 0 GHz to 20 0 GHz 39 69 98 104 102 125 20 0 GHz to 40 0 GHz 33 63 92 98 96 119 40 0 GHz to 65 0 GHz 27 57 86 92 90 113 693XXB B 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS POWER LINE and FAN ROTATION SPURIOUS EMISSIONS dBc Frequency Range Offset From Carrier lt 300 Hz 300Hz to 1 kHz gt 1 kHz 10 MHz to lt 500 MHz w Option 21B 98 ee Sue gt 500 MHz to 1050 MHz w Option 218 Spe Rowe S gt 1050 MHz to lt 2200 MHz w Option 21B 98 796 10 MHz o lt 8 4 GHz 50 60 60 gt 8 4 GHz to lt 20 0 GHz lt 46 lt 56 lt 60 gt 20 0 GHz to lt 40 0 GHz lt 40 lt 50 lt 54 gt 40 0 GHz to lt 65 0 GHz lt 34 lt 44 48 RESIDUAL FM CW and Step Sweep modes 50 Hz 15
22. 30 dBc gt 50 MHz to lt 2 GHz 40 dBc gt 2 GHz 2 2 GHz w Option 21B to lt 20 GH20 dBc gt 20 GHz to 40 GHz 40 dBc Harmonic and Harmonic Related Models having a high end frequency of gt 40 GHz and units with Option 15B at maximum specified leveled output power 10 MHz to 100 MHz Option 21B 40 dBc 2100 MHz to 2 2 GHz Option 21B 50 dBc 10 MHz to 50 MHz lt 30 dBc gt 50 MHz to lt 2 GHz 40 dBc gt 2 GHz 2 2 GHz w Option21B to 20 GH amp 0 dBc gt 20 GHz to lt 40 GHz lt 40 dBc 50 GHz units gt 40 GHz to lt 50 GHz 40 dBc 60 GHz units gt 40 GHz to lt 60 GHz lt 30 dBc 65 GHz units gt 40 GHz to lt 65 GHz 25 dBc Nonharmonics 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz Option 22 30 dBc 10 MHz to lt 2 2 GHz Option 21B 60 dBc 10 MHz to lt 2 GHz 40 dBc gt 2 GHz 2 2 GHz w Option 21B to 65 GHa0 dBc 693XXB OM PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS SINGLE SIDEBAND PHASE NOISE dBc Hz Frequency Range Offset From Carrier 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz w Option 22 60 90 120 130 130 130 210 MHz to 15 625 MHz w Option 21B 101 131 140 142 141 145 515 625 MHz to 31 25 MHz w Option 21B 95 125 135 137 137 145 231 25 MHz to 62 5 MHz w Option 21B 89 119 134 136 136 144 62 5 MHz to
23. 5 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 13 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 13dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not specification 693XXB OM 5 31 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 14 of 27 Model 69347B Serial No Date Model 69347B with Option 2A Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency z 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 11 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 11 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 11 d
24. 693XXB OM SIGNAL MODULATION then press Edit Edit the current value using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the keypad and the appropriate terminator key To close the open parameter press Edit or Previous Menu When the Delayed or Triggered w delay trigger mode is selected the menu display adds the soft key Step Delay This soft key lets you access menus for setting the step delay parameters and turning the Stepped Delay Mode on and off The Stepped Delay Mode is described on page 3 93 Press More to goto the additional Internal Pulse Status Menu below BBB Mz 12 Trigger Free runt Fy Polarity High On i This menu lets you perform the following Select the modulating signal source Gotothe Pulse Mode Selection menu Gotothe Trigger Mode Selection menu a Gotothe Internal Pulse Configuration menu Press Internal External to select the source of the modulating signal Internal selects the modulating signal from the internal pulse generator external selects the modulating signal from an external source The Pulse status display will reflect your se lection Press Mode to to the Pulse M ode Selection Menu below Single Off single Towb let nite iD Triplet Buadruplet Trigger pg Polarity 3 89 LOCAL FRONT SIGNAL PANEL OPERATION MODULATION This menu displays the pulse modes Single Dou blet Triplet an
25. M Status Menu display Internal Source Once you have pressed Int Ext to select the inter nal M generator as the modulating signal source thelnternal Status Menu below is displayed This menu contains the internal M status window that shows you the current menu selections This menu lets you perform the following Turn M on and off Set the Deviation Set the Rate Go to the Modulation Waveform Selection menu Ooo Press On Off to turn the on and off The Inter nal status display will reflect your selection as On or Off the modulation status area will re flect your selection as Int On or Off 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION This error message is displayed when theinternal actual devia tion is set for 23 45 radians or Fre quency Deviation gt 5 MHz in Nar row mode or gt 460 radians or Frequency Deviation gt 10 MHz in Wide mode Frequency Deviation Actual Deviation in radi ans x Rate The message Reduce Deviation appears at the bottom Of the M status display This error message is displayed when the Rate is set 2100 kHz for non sinewave modulating waveform square triangle or rent frequency rate gt 103 of maximum band frequency The at the bottom of the M status dis play Phase modulation of the out ramp waveforms In units w Op tion 21B operating
26. Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency z 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 13 dBm dBm 17 dBm dBm 12 dBm 16 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 15 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 14dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 13 dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 13 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 13 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification 5 34 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Leve Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 17 of 27 Model 69347B w Option 15B Serial No Date Model 69347B with Option 15B High Power with Option 2A Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency z 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 11 dBm dBm 15 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 14 dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 13 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 7 dBm
27. dition To disable the power measurement function press Meas Power again 693XXB OM Chapter 4 Local Operation Menu Maps Table of Contents 4 1 4 3 4 2 MENU 5 4 3 4 1 intRopuction 4 2 MENU MAP DESCRIPTION 693XXB OM Chapter 4 Local Operation Menu Maps This chapter provides menu maps that support the 693XXB front panel operating instructions found in Chapter 3 It includes menu maps for all of the frequency power level and modulation modes of op eration In addition a menu map for system configuration is also pro vided A menu map shows the menu key selections and instrument menu dis plays for a particular mode of signal generator operation The menu displays are shown as they appear on the instrument and are linked together to show the sequence of menu selection A brief description of the function of each menu s soft keys is provided If a menu soft key selects another menu then it is shown linked to that menu Figure 4 1 on page 4 5 is a sample menu map annotated to identify the key elements Thefollowing is a list of the menu maps contained in this chapter Figure Title Page 4 1 4 5 4 2 CW Frequency Menu Map 4 6 4 3 Analog Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map 4 7 4 4 Step Sweep Frequency Mode Menu 4 8 4 5 Manual Sweep Frequenc
28. to select RF on or off during retrace The display will reflect your selection Press Delta F to select RF on or off during fre quency switching in CW step sweep and list sweep modes The display will reflect your selection Press Ramp Rest to select or 10 for the ramp rest point for sweeps triggered a single or external trigger indicates that the sweep will rest at the bottom of the sweep ramp 10 indicates that the sweep will rest at the top of the sweep ramp The display will reflect your selection Press More to goto the Additional Configure RF menu for more selections Press Previous Menu to return to the System Con figuration Menu display 693XXB OM 3 99 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION E Resetti ng the 693XXB sets the fre quency scaling reference multiplier value to 1 The Term RF Off selection is only available in those 693XXB models having Option 2andFirmware Ver sion 1 01 and above 3 100 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Additional Configure RF Menu When you press More the Additional Configure RF Menu below is displayed Press Reset State to select RF on or off at reset The display will reflect your selection Frequency Scaling Lets you set a reference mul tiplier value and apply it to all frequency parame ters The reference multiplier can be any value between 0 1 and 14 Changing the multiplier value changes the entered and displayed frequenc
29. 10 dBm dBm 14 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 13 dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 11 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 11 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification 693XXB OM 5 23 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Levd Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 6 of 27 Model 69317B w Option 15B Serial No Date Model 69317B with Option 15B High Power with Option 2E Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 11 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Swe
30. 26 5 GHz connect tothe Band 3 input Connection A For measuring frequencies of 26 5 to 65 0 GHz connect to the Band 4 input as shown in Connection B using the appropriate waveguide mixer Option 91 26 5 to 40 GHz Option 92 40 to 60 GHz or Option 93 60 to 90 GHz 5 5 OPERATION VERIFICATION 5 6 Test Procedure CW FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST The following procedure tests both the coarse and fine loops to verify the accuracy of the CW frequency output Step1 Set up the 693XXB as follows a Reset the instrument by pressing then Reset Upon reset the CW Menu below is displayed b Press Edit Fi to open the current fre quency parameter for editing Set F1tothefirst test frequency for the model being tested Table 5 2A is the standard model test record Table 5 2B is for models with Option 11 Step2 Verify that the Frequency Counter read ing meets specifications 100 Hz of the value shown on the test record for stan dard models 10 Hz for instruments with Option 11 Step 3 Record the Frequency Counter reading the test record Table 5 2A or Table 5 2B NOTE The Frequency Counter reading is typically within 1 Hz Differences of a few Hertz can be caused by noiseor counter limitations Differ ences of 100 Hz 10 Hz for instru ments with Option 11 indicate a frequency synthesis probl em Step4 SetF1tothe next test frequency on the test record and record the Fr
31. External OM Source FREQUENCY i 3 T o Edit OM Sensitivity on on H Narrou Selects Narrow Mode LI Sensitivitu 1 666 rad U Sensitivity 1 000 rad U HE Impedance 5a 6000 or 500 y Impedance 5a m Input Impedance HER Source Front Selects Wide Mode Narrow Mode Narrow Refer to Chapter 3 paragraph 3 12 0 008 rad 2a Front Panel Input or Deviation 0 008 rad Rear Panel Input MODULATION SYSTEM for M Mode operating instructions Figure 4 13 Phase Modulation Mode Option 6 Menu Map 693XXB OM 4 17 LOCAL OPERATION MENU MAPS PULSE MODULATION MODE INTERNAL PULSE SOURCE SELECTED a SELECT CONTROL LEVEL ALC SELECT LEVEL CONTROL IODULATIO Wa WS Ma L Trigger Polarity Mi 166 200 00A ipa Delayed High On Step Delay available only when Delayed or Triggered w delay triggering mode selected Pulse Modulation On Off Edit Period or PRF Edit Width and Delay Internal Pulse Step Delay Internal Pulse Status Edit Step Time pares i Sinale s Edit Start Delay Time Single Off n 188 888 us iD 288 8880 us Edit End Delay Time gt gui 198
32. Horizontal Sweep Output Provides OV at beginning and 10V at end of sweep for all sweep modes regardless of sweep width In CW mode the voltage is pro portional to frequency between OV at low end and 10V at the high end of range In CW mode if CW RAMP is en abled a repetitive OV to 10V ramp is provided AM OUT Provides video modulating signal from the inter nal AM generator FM OUT Provides video modulating signal from the inter nal FM generator PULSE VIDEO OUT Provides video modulating signal from the internal pulse generator or external pulse input PULSE SYNC OUT Provides a TTL compatible signal synchronized to the internal pulse modulation output AUX I O Auxiliary Input Output Provides for most of the rear panel BNC connections through a single 25 pin D type connector Supports master slave operation with an other 69XXXA B or 68XXXB C instrument or allows for a single cable interface with the Model 56100A Scalar Net work Analyzer and other Anritsu instruments For a pinout diagram and descriptions see Appendix A Figure A 2 SERIAL I O Serial Input Output Provides access to RS 232 terminal ports to support service and calibration functions and master slave operations IEEE 488 GPIB Provides input output connections for the General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB For a pinout dia gram see Appendix A Figure A 3 693XXB OM PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS OPTIONS Option 1 Rack Mounting Rack mount kit c
33. L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 and L9 LO To select one of the preset power level sweep ranges from a Level Sweep menu press the main menu key LEVEL CONTROL The Level Sweep Control menu below is displayed In addition to letting you select one of the preset sweep ranges for the power level sweep this menu lets you select logarithmic or linear power level sweep and set the start and stop power level pa rameters for each preset sweep range Setting a Preset Power Level Sweep Range At the Level Sweep Control menu select the power level sweep range L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 or L9 LO that you wish to set The menu then displays the current power level parameters for the selected power level sweep range Now usethe menu edit Soft keys to open the power level parameters for editing Edit the current power level parameter values or enter new power level parameter values for the power level sweep range To dose the open power level parameter when you are finished press its menu edit soft key or make another menu selection Selecting Type of Power Level Sweep Press Log Linear to select logarithmic or linear power level sweep When Log is selected power levels are in dBm when Linear is selected power levels are in mV The soft key label is highlighted in reverse video to reflect your selection 693XXB OM 3 57 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Selecting a Sweep Fre quency Step Power Mode 3 58 POWER LEVEL SWEEP O
34. On Toturn off the selected power offset table and re move user level flatness correction from the test setup press On Off again The User Level Cal menu will display the status Off Entering a Power Offset Table via GPIB User level flatness correction can be applied tothe test setup using a power offset table created from calculated data and entered via the GPIB Refer to the 693XXB GPIB Programming Manual P N 10370 10349 for information and instructions on creating a power offset table and entering it via the GPIB 3 71 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION The master reset function over writes all information stored in the non volatile memory with default values This includes the nine stored front panel setups and the table of 2000 frequency power level sets used for list sweep mode 3 72 LEVELING OPERATIONS Erasing the Power Offset Tables from Memory The power offset tables are stored in non volatile memory A master reset is required to erase the con tents of the tables and reprogram them with default data To perform a master reset proceed as follows Step 1 With the 693XXB in standby press and hold the RF OUTPUT ON OFF key Step2 Press the LINE OPERATE STANDBY key to turn the instrument on Step 3 When the first menu is displayed after the start up display release the RF OUT PUT ON OFF key The contents of non volatile memory have now been erased and reprogrammed with de
35. On or Off Press Edit Sens to open the FM Sensitivity pa rameter then edit the current value using the cur sor control key or rotary data knob or enter an new value using the keypad and the appropriate termi nator key The FM Sensitivity rangeis 10 kHz V to 20 2 for Locked Locked Low Noise and Unlocked Narrow FM modes and 100 kHz V to 100 MHz V for Unlocked Wide FM mode To dose the open FM Sensitivity parameter press Edit Sens or make another menu selection Press 6009 500 to select the input impedance of the input connector The FM status display will re flect your selection Press Front Rear to select the front panel or rear panel FM IN connector The FM status display will reflect your selection 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Phase Modulation Operating Modes NOTE Refer to Appendix B page B 9 for i the specifications for units with Option 21B operating at fre quencies from 10MHzto lt 2 2GHz Providing Phase Modulation 693XXB OM SIGNAL MODULATION When Option 6 is added to the instrument the 693XXB provides phase modulation of the output signal using modulating signals from either its internal M generator or an external source The 693XXB has two operating modes N arrow and Wide In Narrow mode the maxi mum M deviation is the lesser of 3 radians or 10 MHz rate for DC to 10 MHz rates In Wide mode the max
36. Sensitivity Impedance This menu contains the external AM status window that shows the current menu selections and the measured AM Depth The AM depth measurement function measures the voltage of the external modu lation signal and calculates the percentage modula tion value The menu lets you perform the following Q Turn AM on and off SettheAM Sensitivity Select the input impedance 6000 or 509 of the input connector Select the input connector front panel or rear panel AM IN that is connected to the external signal source Press On Off to turn AM on and off The E xternal AM status display will reflect your selection as On or Off the AM modulation status area will reflect your selection as Ext On or Off Press Edit Sens o open the AM Sensitivity parame ter then edit the current value using the cursor con trol key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the keypad and the appropriate terminator key kHz us STEPS for Linear MHz ms dB for Log The AM Sensitivity range is V to 100 in 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT SIGNAL PANEL OPERATION MODULATION Linear and 0 dB V to 25 dB V in Log To close the open AM Sensitivity parameter press Edit Sens or make another menu selection Press 6009 509 to select the input impedance of the input connector The AM status display will re flect your selection Press Front Rear to select the front panel or rear panel AM IN connector The
37. Step2 Select GPIB DEVICES from the menu dis played on the CRT screen Step3 Select SOURCE then SOURCE AD DRESS Step4 Enter 5 on the keypad then press the dB GHz termination key 693XXB OM USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS 693XXB OM USE WITH A 8003 SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER The 8003 will search for a source at address 5 The default GPIB address of the series 693XXB sig nal generator is 5 When the 8003 has properly identified the 693XXB the message Initializing W6700 will be displayed on the 8003 CRT screen The 693XXB emulates the Anritsu 6700B Swept Frequency Synthesizer GPIB command codes 19 USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS USE WITH A HP8757D SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER 7 6 USE WITH A HP8757D SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER The 693XXB signal generator is compatible with the Hewlett Packard Model 8757D Scalar Network Analyzer SNA The following para graphs provide instructions for connecting the 693XXB tothe HP8757D SNA and setting up the signal generator so that it can oper ate as a signal source for the analyzer Operating instructions for the scalar network analyzer can be found in the Hewlett Packard Model 8757D Scalar Network Analyzer Operation Manual SWP DWELL IN STOP SWEEP SEQ SYNC POS Z BLANK HORIZ OUT SWEEP IN 0 10V PULSE TRIGGER IN MODULATOR DRIVE 8757 SYSTEM
38. Sweep Ramp 0 dBm 1 This menu lets you set the dwell time the step size the number of steps and go to the trigger menu Press Dwell Time to open the dwell ti me per step parameter Press Step Size to open the step size parameter Press of Steps to open the number of steps parameter Open the parameter you wish to change then edit the current value using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the key pad and appropriate termination key When you have finished setting the open parameter close it by pressing its menu soft key or by making another menu selection To goto the CW Level Sweep Trigger menu from this menu press Trigger Menu The trigger menu is described on the following page Press Previous Menu to return to the CW L evel Sweep Menu display 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Selecting a CW Power Sweep Trigger 693XXB OM POWER LEVEL SWEEP OPERATION There arethree modes of triggering provided for the CW power sweep automatic external and single The sweep trigger is selectable from the CW L evel Sweep Trigger menu Thefollowing is a description of each trigger mode Auto Automatic The CW power sweep con tinually sweeps from its start power level toits stop power level with optimal retrace time External The CW power sweep recurs when triggered by an external TTL compatible clock pulse to the rear panel AU
39. gt 3 45 ra dians in Narrow mode or gt 460 radians in Wide mode The message Reduce Deviation appears at the bot tom of the M status display 6 10 693XXB OM OPERATOR MAINTENANCE ERROR AND WARNING STATUS MESSAGES Table 6 2 Possible Error Messages during Normal Operations 4 of 4 Error Message Description Pulse Modulation Error Conditions A pulse parameter setting is invalid for the current pulse modulation state as follows Pulse Period lt 125 ns 40 MHz clock or lt 500 ns 10 MHz clock longer than pulse widths delays Single Pulse Mode Free Run or Gated Trigger Width1 gt PRI Delayed Trigger Delay1 Width1 gt PRI Doublet Pulse Mode Free Run Trigger Width1 gt Delay2 or Width1 Delay2 Width1 Width2 gt PRI Delayed Trigger Width1 gt Delay2 or Delay1 Width1 Delay2 Width1 Width2 gt PRI External Trigger with or without Delay Width1 gt Delay2 Triplet Pulse Mode Free Run Trigger Width1 gt Delay2 or Width2 gt Delay3 or Width1 Delay2 Width1 Width2 Delay3 Width2 Width 3 gt PRI Delayed Trigger Width1 gt Delay2 or Width2 gt Delay3 or Delay1 Width1 Delay2 Width1 Width2 Delay3 Width2 Width 3 gt PRI External Trigger with or without Delay Width1 gt Delay2 or Width2 gt Delay3 Quadruplet Pulse Mode Free Run Trigger Width1 gt Delay2 or Width2 gt Delay3 or Width3 gt Delay4 or Width1 Delay2
40. lt 60 0 2 0 2 0 0 01 to 2 0 12 0 gt 2 0 to lt 20 0 10 0 69397B 220 0 to lt 40 0 42 5 e Um 40 0 to 50 0 0 0 gt 50 0 to 65 0 2 0 With Option 15B High Power Installed 0 01 to 2 0 13 0 11 0 11 0 693178 gt 2 0 to lt 8 4 17 0 15 0 11 0 69337B 2 0 to lt 20 0 17 0 15 0 7 0 0 01 to lt 2 0 13 0 11 0 11 0 699413 gt 2 0 to lt 20 0 17 0 15 0 7 0 0 01 to lt 20 0 13 0 11 0 Not 693678 520 0 to 40 0 6 0 43 0 Available Note In models with Option 22 that have a high end frequency of lt 20 GHz rated output power is reduced by 1 dB In models with Option 22 that have a high end frequency of gt 20 GHz rated output power is reduced by 2 dB 693XXB OM B 5 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS LEVELED OUTPUT POWER RANGE Standard Units Without an Attenuator Maximum leveled power to 15 dBm 20 dBm typical With an Attenuator Maximum leveled power to 120 dBm With an Electronic Attenuator Maximum leveled power to 140 dBm Units with Option 15B High Power Without an Attenuator Maximum leveled power to 5 dBm 10 dBm typical With an Attenuator Maximum leveled power to 115 dBm 120 dBm typical For units with a high fre quency limit of 240 GHz and units with Option 15B minimum settable power is 115 dBm 110 dBm typi cal With an Electronic Attenuator Maximum leveled power to 115 dBm 110 dBm typical UNLEVELED OUTPUT POWER RANGE typical Withou
41. service mark the address of the appropriate Anritsu service center Table 2 1 and your return address on the carton one or more prominent locations 2 13 INSTALLATION Table 2 1 ANRITSU Service Centers ANRITSU SERVICE CENTERS UNITED STATES ANRITSU COMPANY 490 Jarvis Drive Morgan Hill CA 95037 2809 Telephone 408 776 8300 1 800 ANRITSU FAX 408 776 1744 ANRITSU COMPANY 10 New Maple Ave Unit 305 Pine Brook NJ 07058 Telephone 201 227 8999 1 800 ANRITSU FAX 201 575 0092 ANRITSU COMPANY 1155 E Collins Blvd Richardson TX 75081 Telephone 1 800 ANRITSU FAX 972 671 1877 AUSTRALIA ANRITSU PTY LTD Unit 3 170 Foster Road Mt Waverley VIC 3149 Australia Telephone 03 9558 8177 FAX 03 9558 8255 BRAZIL ANRITSU ELECTRONICA LTDA Praia de Botafogo 440 Sala 2401 CEP22250 040 Rio de Janeiro Ru Brasil Telephone 021 527 6922 FAX 021 53 71 456 CANADA ANRITSU INSTRUMENTS LTD 215 Stafford Road Unit 102 Nepean Ontario K2H 9C1 Telephone 613 828 4090 FAX 613 828 5400 CHINA ANRITSU ELECTRONICS SHANGHAI CO LTD 2F Rm B 52 Section Factory Building No 516 Fu Te Rd W Shanghi 200131 China Telephone 21 58680226 58680227 FAX 21 58680588 FRANCE ANRITSU S A 9 Avenue du Quebec Zone de Courtaboeuf 91951 Les Ulis Cedex Telephone 016 09 21 550 FAX 016 44 61 065 GERMANY ANRITSU GmbH Grafenberger Allee 54 56 D 40237 Dusseldorf Germany Teleph
42. then edit the current value using the cursor control key or ro tary data knob or enter a new value using the key pad and appropriate termination key When you have finished setting the open parameter close it by pressing its menu soft key or by making another menu selection Press Previous Menu to return to the Slave Fre quencies List menu Return to the Master Slave menu and press Enable to begin master slave operation 693XXB OM USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS Terminating Master Slave Operation 693XXB OM MASTER SLAVE OPERATION The following describes how to terminate master slave operation and return the Slave instrument to local front panel control On the Master instrument select CW mode At the CW Menu press Master Slave to gotothe Master Slave Menu display At the Master Slave Menu display press Enable This terminates master slave operation and returns the Slave instrument to local front panel control 7 9 USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS 7 3 USE WITH A 56100A SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER NOTE The 693XXB s GPIB address should be set to 5 the default ad dress setting for operation with a 56100A SNA To verify or change the GPIB address setting refer to Configuring the GPIB page 3 101 The 56100A SNA will only accept and display nine video markers F1 thru F9 from the 693XXB When performing amplifier testing i only use the 693XXB power
43. 000 us iM 208 8880 us M 05 LE Wa ing Edit Step Size Time B m dh x L Irisser Delayed Trigger Delayed Polarity High On Polarity High RF On __ Select Pulse Internal Fulse Status Mode vv Internal Pulse Source or D Triplet iB uadruplet fg Polarity EXTERNAL PULSE SOURCE SELECTED External Pulse Status Pulse Polarity ort High RF On Pulse Modulation On Off Internal Pulse Source or External Pulse Source Low Level Triggers RF or High Level Triggers RF Front Panel Input or Rear Panel Input Trigger Polarity nterna Internal Pulse Status External Pulse Source Trigger Pulse Single Off Period 1 006 mz Gated 200 000 uz Di Delayed We inz H Triggered Ws DS HZ Triggered u delay H4 W3 Composite Trigger H4 Pulse Period WS Ma Li Tr iseer Polarity Internal Pulse Status 208 008 us Di Mz in Single off 1 006 ms Free runt High RF On i PRF or Period Low Level Triggers RF or High Level Triggers RF 40 MHz or 10 MHz Pulse Generator Clock Front Panel or Rear Panel External Trigger Input Figure 4 14 Pulse Modulation Mode Menu Map 4 18 NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 paragraph 3 12 for Pulse Modula
44. 2 000 005 000 2 000 006 000 2 000 007 000 2 000 008 000 2 000 009 000 2 000 010 000 Specification for all frequencies listed above is 100 Hz All frequencies are in GHz 2 000 000 000 6 000 000 000 10 000 000 000 14 000 000 000 18 000 000 000 22 000 000 000 26 000 000 000 30 000 000 000 34 000 000 000 38 000 000 000 42 000 000 000 46 000 000 000 50 000 000 000 2 000 001 000 2 000 002 000 2 000 003 000 2 000 004 000 2 000 005 000 2 000 006 000 2 000 007 000 2 000 008 000 2 000 009 000 2 000 010 000 5 8 693XXB OM 2 000 000 000 6 000 000 000 10 000 000 000 14 000 000 000 18 000 000 000 22 000 000 000 26 000 000 000 30 000 000 000 34 000 000 000 38 000 000 000 42 000 000 000 46 000 000 000 50 000 000 000 54 000 000 000 58 000 000 000 60 000 000 000 2 000 001 000 2 000 002 000 2 000 003 000 2 000 004 000 2 000 005 000 2 000 006 000 2 000 007 000 2 000 008 000 2 000 009 000 2 000 010 000 Specification for all frequencies listed above is 100 Hz All frequencies are in GHz 2 000 000 000 6 000 000 000 10 000 000 000 14 000 000 000 18 000 000 000 22 000 000 000 26 000 000 000 30 000 000 000 34 000 000 000 38 000 000 000 42 000 000 000 46 000 000 000 50 000 0
45. 3 Powe Levd Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 27 of 27 Model 69397B Serial No Date Model 69397B Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 5 0 GHz CW Frequency 25 0 GHz CW Frequency 50 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 10 dBm dBm 2 5 dBm dBm 0dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 1 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 0 5 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 0 5 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 1 5 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 5 dBm 2 5 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 3 5 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 4 5 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 5 5 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 6 5 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 7 5 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 8 5 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 9 5 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 5 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 2 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB 0 01 to 40 GHz 2 2 dB 40 to 65 GHz Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 2 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB 0 01 to 20 GHz 8 2 dB 20 to 40 GHz 10 2 dB 40 to 65 GHz typical not a specification 693XXB OM 5 45 5 46 Chapter 6 Operator Maintenance Table of Contents 6 1
46. 37 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Levd Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 20 of 27 Model 69367B Serial No Date Model 69367B with Option 2B Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency z 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz CW Frequency 25 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 11 dBm dBm 7dBm dBm dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 6dBm dBm 2dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 3 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 3dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB 2 to 20 GHz 8 2 dB 20 to 40 GHz typical not a specification 5 38 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Levd Acc
47. 4 1 dB 5 1 dB 30 60 dB 4 0 dB 3 5 dB 4 6 dB 5 6 dB 60 122 dB 5 0 dB 4 0 dB 5 2 dB 6 2 dB OTHER OUTPUT POWER SPECIFICATIONS Output Units Output units selectable as either dBm or mV Selection of mV assumes 50Q load All data entry and display are in the selected units Output Power Resolution 0 01 dB or 0 001 mV Source Impedance 502 nomimal Source SWR Internal Leveling lt 2 0 typical Power Level Stability with Temperature 0 04 dB C typical Level Offset Offsets the displayed power level to estab lish a new reference level Output On Off Toggles the RF output between an Off and On state During the Off state the RF oscillator is turned off The On or Off state is indicated by two LEDs located below the OUTPUT ON OFF key on the front panel RF On Off Between Frequency Steps System menu se lection of RF On or RF Off during frequency switching in CW Step Sweep and List Sweep modes RF On Off During Retrace System menu selection of RF On or RF Off during retrace Internal Leveling Power is leveled at the output connec tor in all modes 693XXB OM PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS External Leveling External Detector Levels output power at a remote detector location Accepts a positive or negative 0 5 mV to 500 mV input signal from the remote detector EXT ALC ADJ adjusts the input signal range to an optimum value BNC connector front and rear panel External Power Meter Levels output power at a re
48. 42 00 dBm o 7 7 NUN NINE 058 E068 ALC Laar user Cal Ck 3 588 aaa 8 GHz Level Li 2 66 dEm 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 10 POWER LEVEL SWEEP OPERATION 693XXB OM POWER LEVEL SWEEP OPERATION The 693XXB provides leveled output power sweeps at CW frequencies and in conjunction with frequency sweeps analog and step Power level sweeps can be froma high level to a low level or vice versa Power level sweeps can be selected to be linear or logarithmic The fol lowing paragraphs provide descriptions and operating instructions for the CW power sweep mode and the sweep frequency step power modes Use the CW Power Sweep Mode and Sweep Frequency Step Power Mode menu maps Chapter 4 Figures 4 8 and 4 9 to follow the menu sequences CAUTION Performing power level sweeps that cross step attenuator switch points can cause excessive wear on the switches and reduce the life expectancy of the step attenuator Selecting CW In the CW power sweep mode output power steps Power Sweep between any two power levels at a single CW fre Mode quency Available menus let you set or select the sweep range the step size the dwell time per step thetype of power sweep linear or logarithmic and the sweep trigger To place the signal generator in a CW power sweep mode from a CW frequency menu press the main menu key LEVEL ALC SELECT At the resulting menu display press Lvl Sw
49. 6 0 7 0 8 0 3 16 693 LOCAL FRONT RESET DEFAULT PANEL OPERATION PARAMETERS Table 3 1 Series 693XXB Reset Default Parameters 2 of 2 STEP SWEEP LEVEL SWEEP MODEL SWEEP LEVEL NUMBER TIME DWELL TIME 7 DWELL TIME OFFSET 69317B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0 0 dB 69337B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0 0 dB 69347B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0 0 dB 69367B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0 0 dB 69377B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0 0 dB 69387B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0 0 dB 69397B 50 ms 1 ms 50 50 ms 50 0 0 dB 693XXB OM 3 17 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 6 ENTERING DATA 3 18 ENTERING DATA Before proceeding to the various modes of signal generator operation you need to know how to enter data from the front panel Entering data refers to changing a parameter s value by editing its current value or entering a new value replace the current value The follow ing instructions describe how to 1 open a parameter 2 edit its cur rent value and 3 enter a new value A typical 693XXB menu display below is used throughout the data entry instructions At this menu display you can edit both the CW fre quency and the output power level parameters Li 01 0G dBm SOZA PULSE If you wish to follow along on your instrument you can obtain this same menu display by resetting your instrument press RAASHAN then press Reset Opening the In order
50. AM status display will reflect your selection 693XXB OM 3 77 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Frequency Modulation Operating Modes Refer to Appendix B page B 8 for i theFM specifications for units with Option 21B operating at frequen Gies from 10 MHz to 2 2 GHz Providing Frequency Modulation 3 78 SIGNAL MODULATION The signal generator has four FM operating modes Locked Locked Low Noise Unlocked Narrow and Unlocked Wide the Locked and Locked Low Noise FM modes frequency modulation of the out put signal is accomplished by summing the modu lating signal into the FM control path of the YIG phase lock loop In Locked FM mode the maximum FM deviation is the lessor of 10 MHz or modulation index of 300 for 1kHzto8 MHz rates in Locked Low Noise FM mode the maxi mum FM deviation is the lesser of 10 MHz or modulation index of 3 for 50 kHz to 8 MHz rates In Unlocked FM modes the YIG phase lock loop is disabled to allow for peak FM deviations of up to 100 MHz In Unlocked Narrow mode frequency modulation is obtained by applying the modulating signal to the fine tuning coil of the YI G tuned oscil lator Unlocked Narrow FM mode allows maximum deviations of 10 MHz for DC to 8 MHz rates In Unlocked Wide mode frequency modulation is ac complished by applying the modulating signal to the main tuning coil of the YI G tuned oscillator Un locked Wide FM mode allows maximum
51. BNC 509 or 6009 input impedance All options selectable from modulation menu FM Sensitivity Continuously variable from 10 kHz per volt to 20 MHz per volt Locked Locked Low Noise and Unlocked Narrow FM modes or 100 kHz per volt to 100 MHz per volt Unlocked Wide FM mode selectable from modulation menu Maximum FM Deviation Locked Mode 1 kHz to 8 MHz rates The lesser of 10 MHz or modulation index of 300 Locked Low Noise Mode 50 kHz to 8 MHz rates The lesser of 10 MHz or modulation index of 3 Unlocked Narrow Mode DC to 8 MHz rates 10 MHz Unlocked Wide Mode DC to 100 Hz rates 100 MHz FM Bandwidth 3 dB Locked Mode 1 kHz to 10 MHz Locked Low Noise Mode 30 kHz to 10 MHz Unlocked Narrow Mode DC to 10 MHz Unlocked Wide Mode DC to 100 Hz Flatness 3 kHz to 1 MHz rates 1 dB Accuracy 100 kHz rate 10 Incidental AM 1 MHz deviation 1 MHz rate lt 2 Harmonic Distortion 1 MHz deviation 10 kHz lt 1 Input Level 1V full scale x2V absolute maximum INTERNAL FM GENERATOR Waveforms Sine square triangle positive ramp negative ramp Gaussian noise uniform noise user defined Rate 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz for square triangle and ramp wave forms Resolution 0 1 Hz Accuracy Same as instrument timebase Output BNC connector rear panel User defined waveforms are available with Option 10 User Defined Modulation Capability In external mode accuracy app
52. Frequency 3 36 Master Slave Operation 7 4 Menu Maps AM Mode 4 15 Analog Sweep Frequency Mode 4 7 CW Frequency Mode 4 6 CW Power Sweep Mode 4 12 Description 4 3 Fixed Power Level Mode 4 11 FM Mode 4 16 Leveling Modes 4 14 List Sweep Frequency Made 4 10 Manual Sweep Frequency Mode 4 9 Phase Modulation Mode 4 17 Pulse Modulation Mode 4 18 Sample Menu Map 4 5 Step Sweep Frequency M ode 4 8 Sweep F requency Step Power M ode 4 13 System Configuration 4 19 Messages Error 6 3 6 8 Status 6 12 Warning 6 12 Models List of 1 4 693XXB OM SUBJECT INDEX Modulation Modes AM Mode 3 73 FM Mode 3 73 Phase Modulation Mode 3 73 Pulse Modulation Mode 3 73 O Operating Environment 2 6 Operational Verification Tests 5 3 Operator Maintenance Error and Warning Status Messages 6 3 Routine Maintenance 6 16 Troubleshooting 6 13 Options List of 1 6 P Performance Specifications 1 8 B 1 Phase Modulation Mode Menu Map 4 17 Operating Modes 3 83 Providing Phase Modulation 3 83 Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Tests Accuracy Test Procedure 5 14 Flatness Test Procedure 5 15 Test Records 5 19 5 45 Test Setup 5 13 Power Level Control Level List 3 50 Selecting a Preset Power Level 3 50 Selecting a Preset Sweep Range 3 57 Setting a Preset Sweep Range 3 57 Power Level Modes CW Power Sweep Mode 3 53 Fixed Power Level Mode 3 49 Sweep F requency Step Power Mode 3 53 Power L ev
53. GPIB A connector pinout diagram is shown in Figure A 3 SERIAL I O Provides access to two RS 232 terminal ports to support service and calibration functions and master slave operations RJ45 connector 000G O 0O PULSE SYNC OUT Provides a TTL compatible signal synchronized to the internal pulse modulation output BNC connector 17 FM OUT Provides video modulating signal from the internal FM generator BNC connector FigureA 1 Rear Pand Series 693XXB Synthesized Signal Generator 2 of 2 693XXB OM A 3 REAR PANEL CONNECTOR CONNECTORS PINOUT DIAGRAMS AUX 1 0 13 12 ii 11 23 EE 10 22 118 21 zd 20 L 7 19 6 18 UT E 17 4 16 tl 15 2155 14 1 PIN SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 1 HORIZ OUTPUT Horizontal Sweep Output Provides a OV at beginning and 10V at end of sweep for all sweep modes regardless of sweep width In the CW mode the voltage is proportional to frequency between OV at low end and 10V at the high end of range In CW mode if CW Ramp is enabled a repetitive OV to 10V ramp is pro vided The ramp speed is adjusted by the Sweep Time function GND Chassis Ground SEQ SYNC Sequential Sync Output Provides a 5V signal during sweep retrace at band switching points and during each frequency step in step sweep mode 5V during markers and 10V during the selected marker 4 L ALT ENABLE L Alternate Enable Output Provides a TTL low level signal
54. LOCAL FRONT SIGNAL PANEL OPERATION MODULATION Max Rate xxx MHz In units with Option 21B operating at frequencies from 10 MHz to 2 2 GHz this advisory message 5 displayed for all FM modes except Unlocked Wide Max Rate the lesser of 10 MHz or 103 of the maximum band fre quency the current frequency This error message is displayed when the external FM modulating signal exceeds the input voltage i range 21 15V or lt 1 15V The message Reduce FM Input Level also appears at the bottom of the FM status display FM is turned off until the modulating signal is within the input voltage range This error message is displayed whentheexternal F M actual devia tion is set for 220 MHz in Locked Low Noise mode Locked mode or Unlocked Narrow mode or 2100MHzin Unlocked Wide mode Themessage Reduce Deviation appears at the bottom of the FM status display Refer to Table 6 2 page 6 9 for details 3 82 Q Turn FM on and off Set the FM Sensitivity Select the input impedance 6000 or 509 of the input connector Select the input connector front panel or rear panel FM IN that is connected to the external signal source D Press On Off to turn FM on and off The External FM status display will reflect your selection as On or Off the FM modulation status area will reflect your selection as Ext
55. M9 AF 69317B 3 5 2 0 8 4 2 0 5 0 8 0 8 4 8 4 8 4 84 3 5 2 0 8 4 2 0 5 0 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 8 4 1 0 69337B 3 5 2 0 20 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 11 0 14 0 17 0 20 0 3 5 2 0 20 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 11 01 14 0 17 0 20 0 1 0 69347B 3 5 2 0 20 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 11 0 14 0 17 0 20 0 3 5 2 0 20 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 11 01 14 0 17 0 20 0 1 0 69367B 3 5 2 0 40 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 11 0 14 0 17 0 20 0 3 5 2 0 40 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 11 01 14 0 17 0 20 0 1 0 69377B 3 5 2 0 50 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 11 0 14 0 17 0 20 0 3 5 2 0 50 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 11 0114 0 17 0 20 0 1 0 69387B 3 5 2 0 60 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 11 0 14 0 17 0 20 0 3 5 2 0 60 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 11 0114 0 17 0 20 0 1 0 69397B 3 5 2 0 65 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 11 0 14 0117 0 20 0 3 5 2 0 65 0 2 0 5 0 8 0 11 0114 0 17 0 20 0 1 0 KODEL POWER LEVEL PARAMETERS dBm NUMBER dg L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 L9 69317B 1 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 69337B 1 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 8 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 69347B 1 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 8 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 69367B 1 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 69377B 1 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 8 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 69387B 1 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 8 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 69397B 1 0 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0
56. MODE Sweeps alternately in analog or step sweep between any two sweep ranges Each sweep range may be associated with a different power level MANUAL SWEEP MODE Provides stepped phase locked adjustment of frequency between sweep limits User selectable number of steps or step size B 1 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS 360B VNA SOURCE LOCK MODE Under control of the Anritsu 360B Vector Network Ana lyzer the synthesized signal generator is phase locked at a typical lt 8 5 ms step sweep speed Frequency resolution is limited to 100 kHz Minimum specified frequency is 2 1 GHz for model 69337B LIST SWEEP MODE Under GPIB control or via the front panel up to 4 tables with 2000 non sequential frequency power sets can be stored and then addressed as a phase locked step sweep One table of 2000 points is stored in non volatile memory all other tables are stored in volatile memory Switching Time typical maximum Units having a high end frequency of 20 GHz lt 25 ms to be within 1 kHz of final frequecy Units having a high end frequency of 8 4 GHz lt 5 ms to be within 1 kHz of final frequency PROGRAMMABLE FREQUENCY AGILITY Under GPIB control up to 3202 non sequential frequency power sets can be stored and then addressed as a phase locked step sweep Data stored in volatile memory Switching Time typical maximum Units having a high end frequency of gt 20 GHz 25 ms to be within 1 kHz of final frequecy Units havi
57. No Date Model 69367B with Option 15B High Power with Option 2B Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz CW Frequency 25 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 11 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 0dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 3dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 3dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB 0 01 to 20 GHz 8 2 dB 20 to 40 GHz typical not a specification 5 40 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 23 of 27 Model 69377B Serial No Date Model 69377B without Option 2C Step Attenuator Powe
58. ON the output power level is set to 0 dBm Always disconnect sensitive equipment from the unit before performing self test You can perform an instrument self test at any time during normal operation by pressing 1031 and then Selftest If the signal generator fails self test an error mes sage s is displayed on the front panel data display These error messages describe the malfunction and in most cases provide an indication of what has failed Table 6 1 next page is a summary listing of the self test error messages Induded for each is a description of the probable cause s whether or not the 693XXB is still operable and if operable what operational degradation can be expected OPERATOR MAINTENANCE ERROR AND WARNING STATUS MESSAGES WARNING Self test error messages normally indicate the failure of an internal component or assembly of the signal generator There are no operator serviceable components inside Refer servicing of the instrument to qualified service technicians To prevent the risk of electrical shock or damage to preci sion components do not remove the equipment covers 6 1 Sd f Test Error Messages 1 of 4 Error Message Description Remarks Error 100 DVM Ground Offset Failed Indicates a calibration related problem Do Not Attempt to Operate Refer the instrument to a qualified service technician Error 101 DVM Positive 10V Reference
59. Pulse Status display Press LRF On H RF On to select the polarity of the signal Low or High that turns the RF on The Internal Pulse Status display will reflect your selec tion Press Clock 40 10 to select the pulse generator s dock rate 40 MHz or 10 MHz The soft key label is highlighted in reverse video to reflect your selec tion Press Front Rear to select the front or rear panel PULSE TRIGGER IN connector The soft key label is highlighted in reverse video to reflect your selec tion Press Top Menu to return to the main Internal Pulse Status Menu 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION ee If the Step Delay parameters that are set result in a fractional number of increments then the last fractional one is not taken 693XXB OM SIGNAL MODULATION Stepped Delay Mode The Stepped Delay Mode lets you automatically in crement or decrement the Pulse Delay 1 D1 value according to step delay parameters The mode is only available when the Delayed or Triggered w de lay triggering mode is selected Selecting either trig gering mode adds the soft key Step Delay tothe Internal Pulse Status Menu At the Internal Pulse Status M enu page 3 88 press Step Delay to access the Step Delay Mode Menu below Single 1 68 166 6606 uz itl 2606 006 us E P HZ iD Mz ins H4 i D4 Trigger Delayed Fy Polarity High On 1 This menu lets you tur
60. RF output goes unleveled Error 122 Level Reference Failed Indicates a failure of the level reference circuitry on the A10 PCB Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the 693XXB in this condi tion Error 123 Detector Log Amp Failed Indicates a failure of the level detector log amplifier circuitry on the A10 PCB Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the 693XXB in this condition Error 124 Full Band Unlocked and Unleveled 693XXB OM Indicates a failure of both YIG tuned oscillators Do Not Attempt to Operate Refer the instrument to a qualified service techician 6 5 ERROR AND WARNING STATUS MESSAGES OPERATOR MAINTENANCE Table6 1 Sdf Test Error Messages 3 of 4 Error Message Description Remarks Error 125 8 4 20 GHz Unlocked and Unleveled Indicates a failure of the 8 4 to 20 GHz YIG tuned oscillator Do Not Attempt to Operate Refer the instrument to a qualified service techician Error 126 2 8 4 GHz Unlocked and Unleveled Indicates a failure of the 2 to 8 4 GHz YIG tuned oscillator Do Not Attempt to Operate Refer the instrument to a qualified service techician Error 127 Indicates a failure of the level detector input circuitry on the A10 PCB Use caution Detector Input Circuit and always determine the output power level when operating the 693XXB in this Failed condition Error 128 Indicates a failure
61. Serial No Date Model 69387B without Option 2D Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 5 0 GHz CW Frequency 25 0 GHz CW Frequency 50 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 10 dBm dBm 2 5 dBm dBm 2dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 1 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 0 5 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 0 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 1 5 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 2 5 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 3 5 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 4 5 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 5 5 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 1dBm dBm 6 5 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 7 5 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 8 5 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 9 5 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 5 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 2dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB 0 01 to 40 GHz 2 2 dB 40 to 60 GHz Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 2 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB 0 01 to 20 GHz 8 2 dB 20 to 40 GHz 10 2 dB 40 to 60 GHz typical not specification 693XXB OM 5 43 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Leve Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 26 of 27
62. Set Slave Frequency Offset in 360B VNA Mode Set Slave Power Level in 360B VNA Mode EUN d an a EN 770310771 NOTES 1 Refer to Chapter 3 paragraph 3 7 for CW Frequency Mode operating instruc tions 2 Refer to Chapter 7 paragraph 7 2 for Master Slave operating instructions Figure 4 2 CW Frequency Mode Menu Map 4 6 693XXB OM LOCAL OPERATION ANALOG SWEEP MENU MAPS FREQUENCY MODE Ed Edit Start Frequency Edit End Frequency Y Ex Edit Current LEVEL it Current Sweep Time Power Level Analog S SYSTEM Triggers Single Sweep H Edit Alt Sweep Start Frequency Edit Alt Sweep Can Be Selected qu Stop Frequency Menu Display 0 Analog Sweep i AM DE rM BIB CU cEDI jm F2 20 000 Edit Main Sweep Power Level Edit Alt Sweep Power Level NOTE Edit Start Frequency 1 Refer to Chapter 3 paragraph 3 8 for SEM Edit End Frequency V Analog Sweep F requency M ode oper LEVELALC T ET ag Untag Fighiighte Tm Frequency ating instructions Edit Current __ Edit Highlighted Power Level pissy Frequency On SYSTI On Off 693XXB OM Figure 4 3 Analog Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map 4 7 LOCAL OPERATION MENU MAPS STEP SWEEP FREQUENCY MODE ICW SWEEP SELECT MEM RE
63. Table of Contents Continued Chapter 6 Operator Maintenance 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 INTRODUCTION 4 6 4 baw Ee CA CAD E EO ERROR AND WARNING STATUS MESSAGES Self Test Error Messages Normal Operation Error and Warning Status lt TROUBLESHOOTING ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Cleaning the Fan Filter Cleaning the Data Display ReplacingtheLineFuse Chapter 7 Use With Other Instruments 7 1 7 2 7 4 693XXB OM INTRODUCTION ce Beer ee MASTER SLAVE OPERATION Connecting theInstruments Initiating Master Slave Operation Master Slave Operation Master Slave Operation VNAMode Terminating Master Slave Operation USE WITH A 56100A SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZERS 2 4 2 6 de woe ode ee mo Connecting the 693XXB to the 56100A USE WITH 360B VECTOR NETWORK 2 Connecting the 693XXB tothe 360B Modes of Operation Source Lock Mode USE WITH A 8003 SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER 3209983 eee ee Ge Connecting the 693XXB tothe 8003 Setting Up the 693XXB 2 Initiating 8003 SNA Operation Table of Contents Continued 7 6 USE WIT
64. V GHz for Model 69367B 0 25V GHz for Models 69377B 69387B and 69397B 15 EOS INPUT End of Sweep Input Accepts a TTL high level signal to tell the signal generator to begin the end of sweep dwell 16 EOS OUTPUT End of Sweep Output Provides a TTL high level signal when the signal gener ator has begun the end of sweep dwell 17 AUX 1 Aux 1 Auxiliary input output to the processor PB6 18 SWP DWELL IN Sweep Dwell Input Permits a TTL low level signal to stop the sweep in both ana log and step sweep modes The sweep resumes when the signal is removed 19 AUX 2 Aux 2 Auxiliary input output to the processor PC3 20 BANDSWITCH BLANK Bandswitch Blanking Output Provides a 5V or 5V signal coincident with band switching points Signal polarity is selected from a front panel menu 21 SPARE 22 HORIZ IN Horizontal Sweep Input Accepts a OV to 10V external sweep ramp from a Master signal generator This input is automatically selected when the signal generator is in the Slave Mode 23 Return Horizontal Sweep Input return 24 TXb TXb Serial Data Output from the processor 25 MEMORY SEQ Memory Sequencing Input Accepts a TTL low level signal to sequence through nine stored front panel setups FigureA 2 Pinout Diagram AUX 1 Connector 2 of 2 693XXB OM A 5 REAR PANEL CONNECTOR CONNECTORS PINOUT DIAGRAMS IEEE 488 GPIB 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ZA L En ETE
65. Variation 7 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification 5 36 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Levd Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 19 of 27 Model 69367B Serial No Date Model 69367B without Option 2B Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz CW Frequency 25 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 13 dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 6dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 5dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 7dBm dBm 4dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 6dBm dBm 3dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 6 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 6dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB 0 01 to 20 GHz 8 2 dB 20 to 40 GHz typical not a specification 693XXB OM 5
66. Width1 Width2 Delay3 Width2 Width3 Delay4 Width3 Width4 gt PRI Delayed Trigger Width1 gt Delay2 or Width2 gt Delay3 or Width3 gt Delay4 or Delay1 Width1 Delay2 Width1 Width2 Delay3 Width2 Width3 Delay4 Width3 Width4 gt PRI External Trigger with or without Delay Width1 gt Delay2 or Width2 gt Delay3 or Width3 gt Delay4 693XXB OM 6 11 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE ERROR AND WARNING STATUS MESSAGES Table 6 3 Possible Warning Status Messages during Normal Operation Warning Status Message Description This warning message indicates that the 100 MHz Crystal oven or the 10 MHz Crystal oven if Option 16 is installed has not reached operating temperature Normally displayed during a cold start of the sweep generator If the message is displayed during normal operation it could indicate a malfunction Run self test to verify UNLEVELED Displayed when the RF output goes unleveled Normally caused by exceeding the specified leveled power rating Reducing the power level usually clears the warning message If the warning message is displayed only when AM is selected ON the modulating signal may be driving the RF output unleveled Reducing the modulating signal or adjusting the power level usually clears the warning UNLOCKED When Unlocked Narrow FM or Unlocked Wide FM is selected ON this warning message appears indicating that the instru
67. You can select a power level sweep range as follows Q Edit the current start and stop power level pa rameter values Enter new start and stop power level parame ter values Select one of the preset power level sweep range parameters L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 L7 L8 or 9 10 3 588 m aas GHz Editing the Current Start Stop Power Levels To edit the current power level sweep range open either the start or stop power level parameter In the display above Edit L1 opens the start power level parameter and Edit L2 opens the stop power level parameter Edit the open power level parameter using the cur sor control key or the rotary data knob When you are finished close the open parameter by pressing its menu edit soft key or by making another menu selection Entering New Start Stop Power Levels To enter a new power level sweep range start by opening either the start or stop power level parame ters press Edit L1 or Edit L2 Enter a new power level using the keypad and ap propriate terminator key When you are finished dose the open parameter by pressing its menu edit soft key or by making another menu selection 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT POWER LEVEL PANEL OPERATION SWEEP OPERATION Selecting a Preset Power Level Sweep Range There are five preset power level sweep range pa rameters selectable in the power level sweep modes These preset power level sweep range parameters areL1 L2
68. by the cursor posi tion In addition when editing frequency power level and time parameters the incremental size can be set to a specific value using the system configura tion increment menu paragraph 3 13 Once set and activated each time the or v pad is pressed the parameter s value increases or decreases by the set amount 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION NOTE When Linear power level units selected use the following termina tor keys for power level data entries GHz Sec dBm for V MHz ms dB for mV kHz us STEPS for uV 693XXB OM DATA ENTRY AREA Rotary Data Knob The rotary data knob can be used to changethe value of a parameter that is open for editing The cursor is moved under the open parameter using the and gt pads of the cursor control key Then by slowly turning the knob dockwise or counter clockwise the value of the parameter is increased or decreased by the unit size The unit sizeis deter mined by the cursor placement Turning the knob rapidly changes the value of the parameter in larger steps When editing frequency power level and time parameters the incremental size can be set to a spe cific value using the system configuration increment menu paragraph 3 13 Once set and activated each time the knob is turned clockwise or counter dockwise the parameter s value increases or de creases by the set amount KEYPAD The numeric ke
69. dB minimum A When Option 8 Internal Power Measurement is installed Option 7 Delete AM FM Generators is not available 693XXB OM MODULATION AMPLITUDE MODULATION All amplitude modulation specifications apply at 50 depth 1 kHz rate with RF level set 6 dB below maximum specified leveled output power unless otherwise noted External AM Input Log AM or Linear AM input front or rear panel BNC 50 or 6000 input impedance All options selectable from modulation menu AM Sensitivity Log AM Continuously variable from 0 dB volt to 25 dB volt Linear AM Continuously variable from 0 per volt to 100 per volt AM Depth typical 0 90 linear 20 dB log AM Bandwidth 3 dB DC to 50 kHz minimum DC to 100 kHz typical Flatness DC to 10 kHz rates 0 3 dB Accuracy 5 Distortion lt 5 typical Incidental Phase Modulation 3096 depth 10 kHz rate 0 2 radians typical Input Level 1 full scale x2V absolute maximum INTERNAL AM GENERATOR Waveforms Sine square triangle positive ramp negative ramp Gaussian noise uniform noise user defined Rate 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz for square triangle and ramp wave forms Resolution 0 1 Hz Accuracy Same as instrument timebase Output BNC connector rear panel A User defined waveforms are available with Option 10 User Defined Modulation Capability B 7 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS FREQUENCY MODULATION External FM Input Front or rear panel
70. dBm 2 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 11 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 11 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not specification 693XXB OM 5 35 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 18 of 27 Model 69347B w Option 15B Serial No Date Model 69347B with Option 15B High Power with Option 2F Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 11 dBm dBm 7dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 6dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 4dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 7 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power
71. deviations of 100 MHz for DC to 100 Hz rates The following are the menu selections to provide frequency modulation of the output signal using a modulating signal from both the internal FM gener ator and an external source Press At the resulting menu dis play press The main FM Status Menu below is displayed n F m 16 666 KHZ Unlocked Narrouw 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION UNLOCKED When Unlocked Narrow FM or Un locked Wide is selected ON this warning messageis displayed on all menu displays to remind the opera tor that the carrier frequency is not phase locked 693XXB OM SIGNAL MODULATION Now press the menu soft key More The additional FM Status Menu below is displayed 18 668 a KHz Unlocked Harrow BH B KHz This menu lets you perform the following Select the modulating signal source Gotothe FM Mode Selection menu Press Int Ext to select the source of the modulating signal Int selects the modulating signal from the in ternal FM generator E xt selects the modulating sig nal from an external source The FM status display will reflect your selection Press FM Modes to goto the FM Mode Selection Menu below This menu lets you select the FM operating mode Press Locked LN to select the Locked Low Noise FM operating mode press Locked to select
72. entered results in a step size of less than 1 kHz 0 1 Hz with Option 11 or 0 1 dB 0 001 mV or 5 the step sweep time divided by the number of steps results in a dwell time of 10 ms Entering valid values usually clears the error Displayed in the frequency parameters area of the Master 69XXXB during master slave operation in VNA mode when the slave frequency offset value entered results in a CW frequency or frequency sweep outside the range of the slave 69XXXB Entering a valid offset value clears the error 6 8 693XXB OM OPERATOR ERROR AND WARNING MAINTENANCE STATUS MESSAGES Table 6 2 Possible Error Messages during Normal Operations 2 of 3 Error Message Description Bil Displayed in the modulation status area when one or more of the following error conditions occurrs AM Error Conditions 1 The internal AM rate is set 2100 kHz for a non sinewave modulating waveform square triangle or ramp waveforms The message Reduce Rate ap pears at the bottorm of the AM status display 2 The external AM modulating signal exceeds the input voltage range gt 1 15V or 1 15V The message Re duce AM Input Level appears at the bottom of the AM status display FM Error Conditions 1 The internal FM rate is set 2100 kHz for a non sinewave modulating waveform square triangle or ramp waveforms In units w Option 21B operating lt 2 2 GHz current frequency rate gt 103 of maximum
73. generation via the GPIB The following paragraphs provide information about interface connections cable requirements setting the GPIB operating parame ters and selecting the external interface language Interface Connector Cable Length Restrictions GPIB Inter connection Setting the GPIB Address I nterface between the signal generator and other devices on the GPIB is via a 24 wire interface cable This cable uses connector shells having two connec tor faces These double faced connectors allow for the parallel connection of two or more cables toa single device Figure 2 1 shows the location of the rear panel GPIB connector The GPIB can accommodate up to 15 instruments at any onetime To achieve design performance on the bus proper timing and voltage level relationships must be maintained If either the cable length be tween separate instruments or the cumulative cable length between all instruments is too long the data and control lines cannot be driven properly and the system may fail to perform Cable length restric tions are as follows Nomorethan 15 instruments may be installed on the bus Total cumulative cable length in meters may not exceed two times the number of bus instru ments or 20 meters whichever is less NOTE For low EMI applications the GPIB cable should be a fully shielded type with well grounded metal shell connectors The only interconnection required for GPIB opera tion is be
74. instructions EXTERNAL FM SOURCE SELECTED Internal FM Source or FM On Off External FM Source Selects Locked REQUENC mn Edit FM Sensitivity Selects Locked FM gm Ineedance 608 ee gr Impedance Ni Selects Unlocked Narrow FM FM Mode Unlocked Narrow Impedance FM Mode Unlocked Narrow Unlocked Narrow CONTROL Deviation 80 8080 MHz Front Panel Input or Deviation 8 606 MHz 8 000 MHz Wide Selects Unlocked Wide FM Rear Panel Input SYSTEM 1 1 Low Noise FM 1 1 Figure 4 12 Frequency Modulation Mode Menu Map 4 16 693XXB OM LOCAL OPERATION PHASE MENU MAPS MODULATION MODE INTERNAL SOURCE SELECTED Select Modulation Waveform On Deviation 1 000 8 rad gm Rate 188 000 kHz v QM On Off UM _ Deviation 1 888 radf eviation rate 100 000 Wiz it Edit Rate CONTROL Internal OM Source or External OM Source Selects Narrow Mode Selects Wide Mode On 1 000 rad 100 000 kHz v EXTERNAL SOURCE SELECTED CWISWEEP Lo EC Int Internal OM Source or OM On Off Ext
75. left of the data display The menu soft keys are located at the bottom and to the right of the data display Main Menu Keys Each of the main menu keys shown on the left se lects a main top level menu display These menus let you select the operating mode operating pa rameters and configuration of the instrument A brief functional description of each main menu fol lows CW SWEEP SELECT This menu lets you select between CW Analog Step Manual and List Sweep frequency modes FREQUENCY CONTROL In CW frequency mode this menu lets you select the CW frequency parameter 9 or MO M 9 to use In the Analog Step or Manual Sweep fre quency mode this menu lets you select the sweep range parameters Full F 1 F 2 F3 F 4 F5 dF or F 6 dF to use In Analog or Step Sweep frequency mode the menu also lets you select up to 20 independent pre settable fre quency markers LEVEL ALC SELECT This menu lets you select power level and ALC modes Level L evel Sweep L evel Offset ALC on or off internal or external ALC AL C attenuator decoupling ALC slope and user level flatness correction LEVEL CONTROL I n Level mode this menu lets you select the level parameter LO L9 to use for a CW frequency or fre 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION mm 693XXB OM DATA DISPLAY AREA quency sweep the Level Sweep mode this menu
76. lets you select the power sweep range parameters to use MODULATION This menu provides you with access to sub menus that let you select the type of signal modulation AM FM M or Pulse and control the option settings for each type SYSTEM This menu provides you with ac cess to sub menus that let you 1 reset the in strument to factory selected default values 2 configure the front panel rear panel RF and GPIB 3 set incremental sizes for editing frequency power level and time parameters 4 save or recall instrument setups 5 disable front panel data display 6 perform instru ment self test and 7 perform reference oscil lator calibration Main Menu Key Cursor With the exception of the key when any main menu key is pressed the main menu that is displayed contains a cursor positioned adjacent to the pressed key Figure 3 2 The cursor is displayed on all sub menus of the current menu until a differ ent main menu key is pressed When the 1037 key is pressed the System menu is displayed The System menu and its sub menus do not contain a main menu key cursor Menu Soft Keys As shown on the left five menu soft keys are located below the data display and five menu soft keys are located to the right of the data display In general the menu soft keys located below the data display select the mode of operation for the main Frequency Level ALC Modulation and System menus and the p
77. markers on and off Video Markers To output the tagged marker fre quendies as video markers during an analog or step sweep press Video Markers Video markers will be displayed on the CRT for all tagged marker frequen dies that are within the sweep frequency range Intensity Markers onl y availablein analog sweep frequency mode To output the tagged marker fre quencies as intensity markers during an analog Sweep press Intensity Markers ntensity markers will be displayed on the CRT for all tagged marker frequencies that are within the analog sweep fre quency range Press Previous Menu to return to the Sweep Fre quency Control menu 3 37 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Selecting Alternate Sweep Mode 3 38 SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION n alternate sweep frequency mode the 693XXB s output frequency sweeps alternately between any two sweep ranges in analog sweep or any two sweep ranges in step sweep The process of selecting and activating the alternate sweep is identical for both analog sweep and step sweep frequency modes To select the alternate sweep mode for analog sweeps start with the Analog Sweep Menu display to select the alternate sweep mode for step sweeps start with the Step Sweep M enu display below To go to the Alternate Sweep menu below from the Step Sweep menu press Alt Swp Menu Step Sweep 1 2 888 GEE Bee B GHz Fz 26 888 GEE Level E H Li 0 dEm
78. more than 72 hours require 30 days to return to specified fre quency stability with aging Power 90 132 Vac or 180 264 Vac 48 440 Hz 400 VA maximum Standby With ac line power connected unit is placed in standby when front panel power switch is released from the OPERATE position Weight 23 kg maximum Dimensions 133 H x 429 W x 597 D mm RF Output Connector Type female 40 GHz models Type V female 40 GHz model ENVIRONMENTAL Storage Temperature Range 40 C to 75 C Operating Temperature Range 0 C to 50 C Relative Humidity 5 to 95 at 40 C Altitude 4 600 meters B 11 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS EMI Meets the radiated emission requirements of EN55011 1991 CISPR 11 1990 Group 1 Class A EN50082 1 1997 EN 61000 4 2 1995 4 kV CD 8 kV AD EN 61000 4 3 1997 3 V m ENV 50204 3 V m EN 61000 4 4 1995 0 5 kV SL 1 kV PL EN 61000 4 5 1995 1 kV L L 2 kV L E MIL STD 461C Part 2 REO1 REO2 CE01 CS01 CS02 506 RS03 INPUTS and OUTPUTS Input Output Connectors Nomenclature Type Location AM IN BNC Front amp Rear Panel FM M IN BNC Front amp Rear Panel PULSE TRIGGER IN BNC Front amp Rear Panel EXT ALC IN BNC Front amp Rear Panel K Connector Standard Front Panel RE OUTEUT V Connector Option 9 Rear Panel 10 MHz REF IN BNC Rear Panel 10 MHz REF OUT BNC Rear Panel HORIZ OUT BNC Rear Panel AM OUT BNC Rear P
79. mote power meter location Accepts a 1V full scale input signal from the remote power meter EXT ALC ADJ ad justs the input signal range to an optimum value BNC connector front and rear panel External Leveling Bandwidth 30 kHz typical in Detector mode 0 7 Hz typical in Power Meter mode User Level Flatness Correction Number of points 2 to 801 points per table Number of tables 5 available Entry modes GPIB power meter or computed data CW POWER SWEEP Range Sweeps between any two power levels at a single CW frequency Resolution 0 01 dB step Log or 0 001 mV step Linear Accuracy Same as CW power accuracy Log Linear Sweep Power sweep selectable as either log or linear Log sweep is in dB linear sweep is in mV Step Size User controlled 0 01 dB Log or 0 001 mV Linear to the full power range of the instrument Step Dwell Time Variable from 1 ms to 99 seconds If the sweep crosses a step attenuator setting there will be a sweep dwell of approximately 20 ms to allow setting of the step attenuator SWEEP FREQUENCY STEP POWER A power level step occurs after each frequency sweep Power level remains constant for the length of time re quired to complete each sweep INTERNAL POWER MEASUREMENT Option 8 Sensors Compatible with Anritsu 560 7 5400 71 and 6400 71 Series Detectors Rear panel input Range 16 dBm to 35 dBm Accuracy 1 dB 10 dBm to 10 dBm 2 dB 10 dBm to 35 dBm Resolution 0 1
80. of the RF output signal using modulating signals from the internal AM generator The 693XXB may or may not provide amplitude modulation of the output signal using modulating signals from an external source Error 147 Internal FM circuitry failed Indicates a failure of the internal FM circuitry and loss of the capability to provide frequency modulation of the RF output signal using modulating signals from the internal FM generator The 693XXB may or may not provide frequency modulation of the output signal using modulating signals from an external source Error 148 Pulse 40 MHz reference circuitry failed Indicates a failure of the pulse generator 40 MHz oscillator circuitry The pulse generator may still function however the 40 MHz oscillator is not phase locked to the 10 MHz reference timebase The pulse modulation function may or may not op erate Error 149 Coarse Loop C Osc Failed Indicates the coarse loop C oscillator is not phase locked The 693XXB is still oper able but the accuracy and stability of the frequency outputs are greatly reduced Error 150 Fine Loop Osc 2 Failed Indicates the fine loop oscillator 2 is not phase locked The 693XXB is still operable but the accuracy and stability of the frequency outputs are greatly reduced 693XXB OM 6 7 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE Normal Operation Error and Warning Status Messages ERROR AND WARNING STATUS MESSAGES When an abnormal condition is dete
81. offset has been applied tothe displayed power level 3 52 FIXED POWER LEVEL OPERATION Level offset lets you compensate for a device on the signal generator s output that alters the RF output power level at the point of interest For example the power level at the test device may be less or more than the displayed power level because of the loss through an external transmission line or the gain of an amplifier located between the 693XXB RF output and the test device Using the level offset function you can apply a constant to the displayed power level that compensates for this loss or gain The dis played power level will then reflect the actual power level at the test device To enter an offset value and apply it to the displayed power level go to the Level Menu Then press Edit Offset As shown in the following menu this opens the offset parameter for editing ECL Fa 3 588 mad Bee B GHz Level Li 0 8 dEm Offset 2 00 i AM SI SE Level Lvl Sup BLC Mode ALc Loorfuser Car Edit the current offset value using the cursor con trol key or rotary data knob or enter a new offset value using the keypad and appropriate terminator key To dose the open offset parameter when you are done press Edit Offset or make another menu selec tion Press Offset to apply the offset to the displayed power level In this example a42 00 dB offset is applied toL1 L1 then displays a power level of
82. reference oscillator calibration function lets you calibrate the OSCILLATOR internal 100 MHz crystal reference oscillator of the 693XXB using an CALIBRATION external 10 MHz 0 to 10 dBm reference signal NOTE Before beginning calibration always let the 693XXB warm up for a minimum of 120 hours NOTE To perform calibration of the internal reference os cillator first connect the external 10 MHz reference signal to the 693XXB rear panel 10 MHz REF IN con nector This calibration is not applicableto units having Option 16 High Sta bility Time Base installed Next press the RASUN main menu key At the System Menu display press Cal Menu to gotothe Calibration Menu below Press Refrnce Cal to begin calibration Press Previous Menu to return to the System M enu display When Refrnce Cal is pressed the Calibration Status Menu below is displayed calibration This will permanently charge Calibration Proceed Abort Press Proceed to start the calibration Press Abort to cancel the calibration and return to the Calibration Menu display 3 108 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT REFERENCE PANEL OPERATION OSCILLATOR CALIBRATION When Proceed is pressed the date parameter opens for data entry Enter late 032799 HOt f Using the key pad enter the current date in any desired format Then press any terminator key The Calibration Status Menu disp
83. standby press and hold the RF OUTPUT ON OFF key Step 2 Press the LINE OPERATE STANDBY key toturn the instrument on Step3 When the first menu is displayed after the start up display release the RF OUT PUT ON OFF key The contents of non volatile memory have now been erased and reprogrammed with default data 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT SECURE PANEL OPERATION OPERATION 3 15 SECURE OPERATION The 693XXB can be operated in a secure mode of operation this se cure mode the display of all frequency power level and modulation parameters is disabled during both local front panel and remote GPIB operations The instrument will continue to function normally in all other respects The following paragraphs describe how to place the signal generator in secure mode and how to return to normal op eration To place the 693XXB in the secure mode first press bis to display the System Menu Next press Secure This places the signal gener ator in the secure mode and the Secure Menu be low is displayed Secure Mode Active L Selftest NOTE During secure mode all main menu keys and menu soft keys operate normally The menu soft key labels are displayed and change with menu selections Only the parameter display is disabled Toreturn the 693XXB to unsecured normal opera tion press 1918 then press Reset 693XXB OM 3 107 LOCAL FRONT REFERENCE PANEL OPERATION OSCILLATOR CALIBRATION 3 16 REFERENCE The
84. steers its second local oscillator frequency and phase sig nal so as to phase lock itself to the reference signal from the 693XXB Frequency resolution is limited to 1 kHz intervals This is because of the inherent resolution of the 360B s frequency readout Tracking Mode Configuration In order for the 693XXB to operate with a 360B in tracking mode the signal generator must be operat ing normal mode SS Mode off In addition its GPIB address and data terminator must match the System Bus source address and data terminator that are set on the 360B VNA To verify the GPIB address and data terminator or to turn the SS mode off press KASHANI At the System Menu display press Config When the System Configuration Menu is displayed press GPIB The Configure GPIB Menu below is MEUS eg Config GPIB L GPIB Address GPIB Terminator 693XXB OM USE WITH USE WITH A 360B VECTOR OTHER INSTRUMENTS NETWORK ANALYZER If the GPIB address of the 693XXB needs changing press GPIB Address Enter the new address using the cursor control key or the data entry keypad and the terminator key HZ ns ADRS The new GPIB address will appear on the display To change the data terminator press Line Term to select the correct GPIB data delimiter Toturn SS mode off press SS Mode The signal generator is now configured for 360B tracking mode operation Initiating 360B Tracking Mode Operations Turn on t
85. the Locked FM operating mode press Unlocked Narrow to select theU nlocked Narrow FM operating mode or press Unlocked Wide to select the UnlockedWide FM operating mode The FM status display will re flect your selection Press Previous Menu to return to the additional FM Status Menu display At this display press Previous Menu to return to the main FM status display 3 79 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION This error message is displayed whentheFM actual deviation is set for 220M Hz or Mod Index 23 45 in Locked Low Noise mode 220 MHz or ModIndex 2460 in Locked mode 220 MHz in Unlocked Narrow mode or 2100 MHz in Unlocked Wide mode The message Reduce Deviation appears at the bottom of the FM status display Refer to Table 6 2 page 6 9 for details This error message is displayed when the FM Rate is set 2100 kHz for non sinewave modulating waveform square triangle or ramp waveforms In units w Op tion 21B operating lt 2 2 GHz cur rent frequency rate gt 103 of maximum band frequency The message Reduce Rate appears at the bottom of the FM status dis play Frequency modulation of the output signal will continue but the modulating waveform may be dis torted SIGNAL MODULATION Internal FM Source Once you have pressed Int Ext to select the inter nal FM generator as the modulating si
86. the accuracy and stability of frequency outputs be low 2 GHz is greatly reduced Error 115 Not Locked Indicator Failed Indicates failure of the not phase locked indicator circuit The 693XXB is still oper able but an error message will not appear on the data display when the output fre quency is not phase locked Error 116 FM Loop Gain Check Failed Indicates FM loop has failed or the loop gain is out of tolerance The 693XXB is still operable but frequency accuracy and stability are degraded Error 117 Linearizer Check Failed Indicates a failure of the Linearizer DAC on the A12 PCB The 693XXB is still oper able but frequency accuracy of the RF output is degraded Error 118 Switchpoint DAC Failed Indicates a failure of the Switchpoint DAC on the A12 PCB The 693XXB will not produce analog sweeps but should operate normally in CW and step sweep modes Error 119 Center Frequency Circuits Failed Indicates a failure of the center frequency circuitry on the A12 PCB Do Not Attempt to Operate Refer the instrument to a qualified service technician Error 120 Delta F Circuits Failed Indicates a failure of the AF Width DAC on the A12 PCB The 693XXB will not generate AF analog sweeps but should produce AF step sweeps Error 121 Unleveled Indicator Failed Indicates failure of the not leveled detector circuitry on the A10 PCB The 693XXB is still operable but a warning message will not appear when the
87. the fuse cap counter clockwise and re move the fuse holder Step 3 Replace the fuse the fuse holder 693XXB OM 6 17 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 6 18 Step 4 Step 5 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Install the fuse holder in the rear panel Using the screwdriver rotate the fuse cap clockwise to secure the fuse holder in place Reconnect the signal generator to the power source 693XXB OM Chapter 7 Use With Other Instruments Table of Contents 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 MASTER SLAVE OPERATION Connecting the Instruments Initiating Master Slave Operation Master Slave Operation Master Slave Operation in VNA Mode Terminating Master Slave Operation USE WITH A 56100A SCALAR NETWORK Connecting the 693XXB to the 56100A USE WITH A 360B VECTOR NETWORK Connecting the 693XXB tothe 360B Modes of Operation Source Lock Mode 4 uo om ow TrackingMode USE WITH A 8003 SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER 4 Ux Oo Sb aw d Connecting the 693XXB tothe 8003 Setting Up the 693XXB 3 9 x x39 30 Initiating 8003 SNA Operation USE WITH AHP8757D SCALAR NETWORK Connecting the 693X
88. time the or v pad of the cursor control key is pressed the list index incre ments or decrements by one The List Index soft key is used if alarger change in the list index is desired The only time the cursor control key will not change the list index is when a different parameter such as frequency power level etc is open The cursor con trol key will then change the value of the open pa rameter Once the open parameter is closed the cursor control key will again changethe list index 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM Editing the List SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION Performing List Calculations The PreCalc List soft key initiates a process that examines every index in the list and performs all the calculations necessary to set the frequency and power levels The soft key does not have to be pressed every time the list changes The instrument will perform the calculations to set the frequency and power levels as it performs the initial list sweep This causes the initial list sweep to take longer than each subsequent sweep Using the PreCalc List soft key lets the initial list sweep be as fast as each subsequent sweep The calculations are stored in volatile RAM and are lost at instrument power off Press PreCalc List to perform list calculations The soft key image depresses to show that calculations arein progress When the calculations are com pleted the soft key returns to normal appearance List
89. to open the alternate sweep power level parameter Open the parameter you wish to change then edit the current value using the cursor control key or ro tary data knob or enter a new value using the key pad and appropriate termination key When you 693XXB OM USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS Master Slave Operation with the master slave configura tion will not display markers Master Slave Operation in VNA Mode 693XXB OM MASTER SLAVE OPERATION have finished setting the open parameter close it by pressing its menu soft key or by making another menu selection Press Enable to begin master slave operation Press CW toreturn tothe CW menu During master slave operation the Slave unit is in remote mode under the direct control of the Master unit The Slave unit displays the following Its output CW frequency or sweep frequency range Its output power level The messages Remote and Local Lockout The CW sweep frequency settings on the Master unit define the master sweep and the corresponding frequency settings on the Slave unit define the slave sweep For example if slave frequency F 1 is set to 4 GHz and slave frequency F2 is set to 12 GHz then the Slave unit will sweep from 4 to 12 GHz when ever the F 1 F 2 sweep range is selected on the M as ter unit The Master unit will sweep from F 1 F 2 with the values of F 1 and F2 defined in the Master unit s frequency list In the mode of m
90. typical 231 25 MHz to 125 MHz lt 130 mV typical gt 125 Mhz to 500 MHz lt 70 mV typical 2500 MHz to 2 2 GHz lt 15 mV typical Pulse Width Compression 10 MHz to 31 25 MHz lt 40 ns typical 231 25 MHz to 125 MHz lt 12 ns typical gt 125 Mhz to 500 MHz 12 ns typical gt 500 MHz to 2 2 GHz lt 12 ns typical 693XXB OM PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS REMOTE OPERATION All instrument functions settings and operating modes except for power on standby are controllable using com mands sent from an external computer via the GPIB IEEE 488 interface bus GPIB Address Selectable from a system menu IEEE 488 Interface Function Subset Source Handshake SH1 Acceptor Handshake AH1 Talker 6 Listener L4 Service Request SR1 Remote Local Parallel Poll PP1 Device Clear DC1 Device Trigger DT1 Controller Capability CO C1 C2 C3 C28 Tri State Driver E2 GPIB Status Annunciators When the instrument is oper ating in Remote the GPIB status annunciators listed be low will appear in a window on the front panel LCD REMOTE Operating on the GPIB all instrument front panel keys except for the SYSTEM key and the RETURN TO LOCAL soft key will be ignored LLO LOCAL LOCKOUT Disables the RETURN TO LOCAL soft key Instrument can be placed in local mode only via GPIB or by cycling line power Command Structures The instrument responds to the published GPIB commands and responses
91. which indicates that the alternate sweep mode is active 5 MARKER OUTPUT Marker Output Provides a 5V or 5V signal during a marker Signal polarity se lected from a front panel menu 6 RETRACE BLANKING Retrace Blanking Output Provides a 5V or 5V signal coincident with sweep re trace Signal polarity selected from a front panel menu 7 L ALT SWP L Alternate Sweep Output Provides a TTL low level signal to indicate that the pri mary sweep is in progress or a TTL high level signal to indicate that the alternate sweep is in progress 8 Shield Cable Shield Chassis Ground 9 TRIGGER OUTPUT Trigger Output Provides a TTL low level trigger signal for external devices or in struments 10 SWP DWELL OUT Sweep Dwell Output Provides an open collector output which goes to ground when the sweep is dwelled at the start stop and bandswitching frequencies and at the markers 11 LOCK STATUS Lock Status Output Provides a TTL high level signal when the frequency is phase locked 12 RXb RXb Serial Data Input to the processor t1 13 EXT TRIGGER External Trigger Accepts a TTL low level signal of 1 us width to trigger a sweep FigureA 2 Pinout Diagram AUX 1 Connector 1 of 2 A 4 693XXB OM REAR PANEL CONNECTOR CONNECTORS PINOUT DIAGRAMS PIN SIGNAL NAME SIGNAL DESCRIPTION 14 V GHz V GHz Output Provides a reference voltage relative to the RF output frequency 1 0 V GHz for Models 69317B 69337B and 69347B 0 5
92. 0 to select the input impedance of the input connector The M status display will re flect your selection Press Front Rear to select the front or rear panel FM M IN connector The status display will re flect your selection 693XXB OM SIGNAL LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Pulse Modulation Operating Modes MODULATION The 693XXB signal generator provides pulse modu lation of the output signal using modulating signals from either its internal pulse generator or an exter nal source The internal pulse generator has four pulse modes single doublet double pulse triplet triple pulse and quadruplet quadruple pulse Individual pulse widths W1 W2 W3 and W4 and delays D1 D2 D3 and D4 can be set for each of the pulses in a mode PULSE SYNC OUT 1 PERIOD gt wi w2 w3 w4 OUTPUT lt D1 35 D2 59 D3 The internal pulse generator can be internally trig gered externally triggered internally and exter nally triggered with delay and externally gated Thereis also a composite mode in which an external pulse is summed with the internal pulse to pulse modulate the output signal Whenever the internal pulse generator is internally triggered a TTL compatible signal that is synchro nized to the internal pulse modulation output is available at the rear panel PULSE SYNC OUT con
93. 00 000 54 000 000 000 58 000 000 000 62 000 000 000 65 000 000 000 2 000 001 000 2 000 002 000 2 000 003 000 2 000 004 000 2 000 005 000 2 000 006 000 2 000 007 000 2 000 008 000 2 000 009 000 2 000 010 000 OPERATION CW FREQUENCY VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST Table 5 2A CW Frequency Accuracy Test Record for Standard M odds 3 of 3 Model693 B Serial No Date 69387B 69397B 693XXB OM 5 9 OPERATION CW FREQUENCY VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST Table 5 2B CW Frequency Accuracy Test Record for Models with Option 11 1 of 3 Model693 B Serial No Date 69317B 69237B 69347B 1 000 000 000 0 2 000 000 000 0 4 000 000 000 0 6 000 000 000 0 8 000 000 000 0 2 000 000 100 0 2 000 000 200 0 2 000 000 300 0 2 000 000 400 0 2 000 000 500 0 2 000 000 600 0 2 000 000 700 0 2 000 000 800 0 2 000 000 900 0 2 000 001 000 0 Specification for all frequencies listed above is 10 Hz All frequencies are in GHz 2 000 000 000 0 5 000 000 000 0 8 000 000 000 0 11 000 000 000 0 14 000 000 000 0 17 000 000 000 0 20 000 000 000 0 2 000 000 100 0 2 000 000 200 0 2 000 000 300 0 2 000 000 400 0 2 000 000 500 0 2 000 000 600 0 2 000 000 700 0 2 000 000 800 0 2 000 000 900 0 2 000 001 000 0 5 10 693XXB OM 2 000 000 000 0 5
94. 000 000 000 0 8 000 000 000 0 11 000 000 000 0 14 000 000 000 0 17 000 000 000 0 20 000 000 000 0 23 000 000 000 0 26 000 000 000 0 29 000 000 000 0 32 000 000 000 0 35 000 000 000 0 38 000 000 000 0 40 000 000 000 0 2 000 000 100 0 2 000 000 200 0 2 000 000 300 0 2 000 000 400 0 2 000 000 500 0 2 000 000 600 0 2 000 000 700 0 2 000 000 800 0 2 000 000 900 0 2 000 001 000 0 Specification for all frequencies listed above is 10 Hz All frequencies are in GHz 2 000 000 000 0 6 000 000 000 0 10 000 000 000 0 14 000 000 000 0 18 000 000 000 0 22 000 000 000 0 26 000 000 000 0 30 000 000 000 0 34 000 000 000 0 38 000 000 000 0 42 000 000 000 0 46 000 000 000 0 50 000 000 000 0 2 000 000 100 0 2 000 000 200 0 2 000 000 300 0 2 000 000 400 0 2 000 000 500 0 2 000 000 600 0 2 000 000 700 0 2 000 000 800 0 2 000 000 900 0 2 000 001 000 0 OPERATION CW FREQUENCY VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST Figure 5 2B CW Frequency Accuracy Test Record for Models with Option 11 2 of 3 Model693 B Serial No Date 69367B 69377B 693XXB OM 5 11 OPERATION CW FREQUENCY VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST Table 5 2B CW Frequ
95. 01 dB Log or 0 001 mV Linear Entering a valid step size will clear the error level step that occurs after each frequency sweep set the step size or set the number of steps The step size range is 0 01 dB Log or 0 001 Linear to the full power range of the signal generator the number of steps range is 1 to 10 000 The power level step size is set from the level sweep ramp menu To goto the Level Sweep Ramp Menu below from the Level Sweep menu press Sweep Ramp gd Auto Dwell Time Step Size 3 Mum of Steps Trigger Meru Hernu Cel SuplaLC ModelALC Loor User Cal This menu lets you set the step size and the number of steps Press Step Size to open the step size parameter Press of Steps to open the number of steps pa rameter Open the parameter you wish to change then edit the current value using the cursor control key or ro tary data knob or enter a new value using the key pad and appropriate termination key When you have finished setting the open parameter close it by pressing its menu soft key or by making another menu selection Press Previous Menu to return to the Level Sweep Menu display 693XXB OM 3 59 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 11 LEVELING 3 60 OPERATIONS LEVELING OPERATIONS The 693XXB generates leveled output power over a maximum range of up to 33 dB up to 149 dB with Option 2 Instruments with Option 15B provide leveled out
96. 14 3 15 3 16 3 17 693XXB OM SIGNAL MODULATION 3 73 Amplitude Modulation Operating Modes 3 73 Providing Amplitude Modulation 3 73 Frequency Modulation Operating Modes 3 78 Providing Frequency Modulation 3 78 Phase Modulation Operating Modes 3 83 Providing Phase Modulation 3 83 Pulse Modulation Operating Modes 3 87 Providing Pulse Modulation 3 88 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 24 45 4 4 3 96 Configuring the Front Panel 3 97 Configuring the Rear Panel 3 98 Configuring the RP ae eee ee 3 99 ConfiguringtheGPIB 3 101 Setting Increment Sizes 3 104 SAVING RECALLING INSTRUMENT SETUPS 3 105 Saving a soe a et eas 3 105 Recalling Setups e dm wes us tee ee ee a 3 105 Erasing Stored Setups 3 106 SECURE OPERATION 5 xx ex dw 3 107 REFERENCE OSCILLATOR CALIBRATION 3 108 INTERNAL POWER METER OPTION 8 3 110 3 3 3 1 INTRODUCTION 693XXB OM Chapter 3 Local Front Panel Operation This chapter provides information and instructions on operating the Series 693XXB Synthesized High Performance Signal Generator using the front panel controls It contains the following Q Illustrations and diagrams of the front panel data display area and data entry area that identify and describe all front panel contr
97. 2 2 GHz cur message Reduce Rate appears put signal will continue but the torted sine wave EN square wave y positive ramp NN negative ramp GN Gaussian noise UN uniform noise N triangle wave 693XXB OM modulating waveform may be dis SIGNAL MODULATION Press Edit Dev to open the Deviation parame ter then edit the current value using the cursor con trol key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the keypad and the GHz Sec dBm terminator key The M Deviation range is 0 0025 to 5 radians in Narrow M mode and 0 25 to 500 radians in Wide mode To dose the open Deviation pa rameter press Edit Dev or make another menu se lection Press Edit Rate to open the M Rate parameter then edit the current value using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the keypad and the appropriate terminator key The Raterangeis 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave and 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz ro square triangle and ramp waveforms To close the open Rate parameter press Edit Rate or make another menu selection Press Mod Wave to go to the Modulation Waveform Selection Menu below On 1 668 5m rad 166 888 4 kHz This menu displays the modulation waveforms on the left that are available from the M generator Use the cursor control key to highlight the desired modulation waveform the press Select
98. 2220 Carrying Handle Figure 2 2 Front Handle Feet and Carrying Handle Removal 2 10 693XXB OM RACK MOUNTING KIT INSTALLATION cuis eevee ne M E ERE RE EM E mE EL Se eee eee eee The screws with green heads have metric threads When it becomes necessary to replace any of these screws always use the exact re placement green headed screws Anritsu P N 2000 560 to avoid damage to the instrument Step 4 Step 5 Step 6 Step 7 Step amp Step 9 INSTALLATION Remove the inner slide assemblies from the outer slide assemblies Place the left side inner slide assembly onto the instrument case with the handle towards the front of the instrument Fig ure 2 3 Insert two green headed screws through the holes in the slide assembly behind the handle and into the metric tapped holes in the side of the instrument Insert two green headed screws through the holes near the rear of the slide assem bly and into the metric tapped holes in the side of the instrument Insert the two SAE threaded screws re moved from the feet through the 90 tabs on the rear of the slide assembly and into the rear panel of the instrument Using the Phillips screwdriver tighten all screws holding the left side slide assem bly to the instrument chassis Figure 2 3 Rack Mounting Hardware Installation 693XXB OM 2 11 INSTALLATION gt 18 kg HEAVY W
99. 37B with Option 15B High Power without Option 2 Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power 17 dBm dBm 16 dBm dBm 15 dBm dBm 14 dBm dBm 13 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 17 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 17dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification 5 28 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Leve Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 11 of 27 Model 69337B w Option 15B Serial No Date Model 69337B with Option 15B High Power with Option 2A Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power 15 dBm dBm 14 dBm dBm 13 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 15 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 15 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical
100. 47B 0 01 20 0 GHz 13 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 3 0 dBm 0 01 2 0 GHz 13 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 69367B 2 0 20 0 GHz 9 0 dBm 7 0 dBm Not Available 20 0 40 0 GHz 6 0 dBm 3 0 dBm 0 01 2 0 GHz 11 0 dBm 10 0 dBm 2 0 20 0 GHz 10 0 dBm 8 5 dBm 20 0 40 0 GHz 2 5 dBm 0 0 dBm Not Avallable 40 0 50 0 GHz 2 5 dBm 1 0 dBm 0 01 2 0 GHz 11 0 dBm 10 0 dBm 2 0 20 0 GHz 10 0 dBm 8 5 dBm 69387B 20 0 40 0 GHz 2 5 dBm 0 0 dBm Not Available 40 0 50 0 GHz 2 0 dBm 1 5 dBm 50 0 60 0 GHz 2 0 dBm 2 0 dBm 0 01 2 0 GHz 411 0 dBm 2 0 20 0 GHz 410 0 dBm 69397B 20 0 40 0 GHz 2 5 dBm Not Available Not Available 40 0 50 0 GHz 0 0 dBm 50 0 65 0 GHz 2 0 dBm With Option 15B High Power Installed 69317B 0 01 2 0 GHz 13 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 2 0 8 4 GHz 17 0 dBm 15 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 69337B 2 0 20 0 GHz 17 0 dBm 15 0 dBm 7 0 dBm 69347B 0 01 2 0 GHz 13 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 2 0 20 0 GHz 17 0 dBm 15 0 dBm 7 0 dBm 0 01 20 0 GHz 13 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 20 0 40 0 GHz 6 0 dBm 3 0 dBm Not Availale 69377B 0 01 50 0 GHz Standard Standard Not Available 69387B 0 01 60 0 GHz Standard Standard Not Available Note In models with Option 22 that have a high end frequency of lt 20 GHz rated output power is reduced by 1 dB In models with Option 22 that have a high end frequency of gt 20 GHz rated output power is reduced by 2 dB 1 4 693XXB OM G
101. 6 Data Display Area 3 6 3 7 RF Output Control Key 3 7 Connedtors 3 7 DATA DISPLAY 3 8 Menu lt amp 3 9 3 10 DATA ENTRY 3 12 INSTRUMENT START UP 5 5 24 64 4 42 a4 6 3 3 14 Powering Up the 693XXB 3 14 Start Up Display 3 14 Standby Operation 3 14 Self Testing the 693XXB 3 15 Resetting to Default Parameters 3 15 3 18 Opening the Parameter 3 18 Editing the Current Value 3 19 Entering New Value 3 20 CW FREQUENCY OPERATION 3 21 Selecting CW 3 21 Selecting CW Frequency 3 22 Selecting a PowerLevel 3 24 UE eere a ae uc os a Sek heel te De 3 25 SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION 3 26 Analog Sweep Mode 3 26 Selecting Analog Sweep Mode 3 26 Setting Sweep Time 3 27 Selecting a Sweep Trigger 3 28 Step Sweep 3 29 693XXB OM Table of Contents Continued 3 9 3 10 3 11 3 12 693XXB OM Selecting Step Sweep M ode Setting Step Size Dwell Time and Sweep Time Manual Sweep Selecting Manual Sweep Mod
102. 6 OPTIONS s scs six a OE a 1 6 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS 1 8 RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT 1 8 Chapter 2 Installation 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 693XXB OM 2 3 INITIAL INSPECTION aoaaa anaa 2 3 PREPARATION FOR USE sss os 2 4 Power Requirements 2 4 Line Voltage Selection 2 4 Power Connection 2 4 Standby Operation 2 5 2 6 Operating Environment 2 6 GPIB SETUPANDINTERCONNECTION 2 7 Interface Connector 2 7 Cable Length Restrictions 2 7 GPIB Interconnection 2 7 Setting the GPIB Address 2 7 Selecting the Line Terminator 2 9 Selecting the Interface Language 2 9 RACK MOUNTING INSTALLATION 2 10 Preliminary 2 10 Procedure 2 10 Table of Contents Continued 2 6 PREPARATION FOR STORAGE SHIPMENT 2 13 Preparation for Storage 2 13 Preparation for Shipment 2 13 Chapter Local Front Pane Operation 3 1 3 2 3 4 3 5 3 6 3 7 3 8 INTRODUCTION 1 2233 doa aa Sus 3 5 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT 4 2 s 6 664 6 6 daca 3 6 2 eux 2 3 3
103. 7 LOCAL FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY PANEL OPERATION Selecting a Sweep Trigger 3 28 OPERATION There are three modes of sweep triggering provided for analog sweep and step sweep automatic exter nal and single The sweep trigger is selectable from the trigger menu The following is a description of each mode Auto Automatic The sweep continually sweeps from its start frequency to its stop fre quency with optimal retrace time External The sweep recurs when triggered by an external TTL compatible clock pulse to the rear panel AUX I O connector Single A single sweep starts when the trigger key is pressed If a sweep is in progress when the key is pressed it aborts and resets To go to the Sweep Trigger menu below from the Analog Sweep Ramp menu press Trigger Menu To select a sweep trigger mode press its menu soft key A message showing the sweep trigger mode se lected appears on the right side of frequency title bar When you are finished press Previous Menu to return tothe Analog Sweep Ramp menu f you select the single sweep trigger mode the menu display adds the menu soft key Trig Press ing Trig starts a single sweep If a single sweep is in progress pressing Trig causes the sweep to abort and reset Analoga Sweep Sinale F1 2 000 GHG HEB B GHz B 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Step Sweep Mode Selecting Step Sweep Mode Setting S
104. B Address 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM LEVELING OPERATIONS At the Configure GPIB menu press to an Additional Configure GPIB menu below Config GPIE E Fur Meter Address 15 Pur Heter emm Language Press Pwr Address to change the address of the power meter on the GPIB the power meter s default address is 13 Enter the new address between 1 and 30 using the cursor control key or the data en try key pad and the terminator key Hz ns ADRS The new GPIB address will appear on the display Press Pwr Mtr Select to select the power meter model being used Supported power meters are Anritsu ML2437A ML2438A and ML4803A and Hewlett Packard 437B 438A and 70100A Press Previous Menu to return to the main Config ure GPIB menu display At the Configure GPIB menu press Previous Menu to return to the System Configuration menu display Creating a Power Offset Table The 693XXB must be in CW frequency mode and fixed non swept power level mode in order to cre ate a power offset table for user level flatness cor rection Placethe signal generator in CW frequency mode by pressing the main menu key CW SWEEP SELECT At the resulting menu display press CW The 693XXB is now in CW frequency mode 3 69 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 70 LEVELING OPERATIONS Place the signal generator in a fixed power level mode by pressing the main menu key L
105. B The 693XXB signal generator is compatible with the Anritsu Model VECTOR NETWORK 360B Vector Network Analyzer VNA The following paragraphs pro ANALYZER vide instructions for connecting the 693XXB to the 360B VNA and con figuring the signal generator so that it can operate as a signal source for the analyzer Operating instructions for the vector network ana lyzer can be found in the Model 360B Vector Network Analyzer Opera tion Manual P N 10410 00110 MODEL 360B VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER SOURCE CONTROL SYSTEM BUS 10 MHz REF OUT EXT FM LOCK OUTPUT MODELS 361XA AND 362XA GPIB TESTSETS SEMI RIGID COAXIAL CABLE MODEL 693XXB SIGNAL GENERATOR IEEE 488GPIB L RF OUTPUT Figure 7 3 693XXB to 360B VNA Connections Connecting Connect the 693XXB signal generator to the 360B the 693XXB to vector network analyzer as shown in Figure 7 3 the 360B Step 1 Connect one end of a coaxial cable to the 693XXB rear panel FM IN connector Connect the other end to the 360B rear panel EXT FM LOCK OUTPUT connector Step 2 Connect one end of a coaxial cable to the 693XXB rear panel 10 MHz REF IN con 693XXB OM 7 11 USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS NOTE f the 693X
106. Bm dBm 4 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 11 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 11 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification 5 26 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Leve Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 9 of 27 Model 69337B Serial No Date Model 69337B with Option 2F Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power 3 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 3 dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power 3 dBm dBm dBm Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification Variation dB 693XXB OM 5 27 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Leve Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 10 of 27 Model 69337B w Option 15B Serial No Date Model 693
107. Bm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification 5 32 693 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 15 of 27 Model 69347B Serial No Date Model 69347B with Option 2F Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 3 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 5dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 3 dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Set Power 3 dBm Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Max Power dBm Min Power Variation dB 693XXB OM 5 33 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Levd Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 16 of 27 Model 69347B w Option 15B Serial No Date Model 69347B with Option 15B High Power without Option 2 Step Attenuator
108. Contact For Anritsu product EMC amp LVD information contact Anritsu LTD Rutherford Close Stevenage Herts SG1 2EF UK FAX 44 1438 740202 Safety Symbols To prevent the risk of personal injury or loss related to equipment malfunction Anritsu Company uses the following symbols to indicate safety related information For your own safety please read the information carefully BEFORE operating the equipment WARNING WARNING indicates a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that could result in personal injury or loss of life if not performed properly Do not proceed beyond a WARNING notice until the indicated condi tions are fully understood and met CAUTION CAUTION indicates a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not performed properly could result in damage to or destruction of a component of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a CAUTION note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met The instrument is marked with this symbol to indicate that it is neces sary for the user torefer tothe instructions in the operation manual Indicates ground gt 18 kg Indicates heavy weight equipment HEAVY WEIGHT 693XXB OM Safety 1 For Safety WARNING When supplying power to this equipment always use a three wire power cable connected to a three wire power line outlet If power is supplied without grounding the equip ment in this manner there is a risk of receiving a se
109. EIGHT 2 12 Step 10 Step 11 Step 12 Step 13 Step 14 Step 15 Step 16 RACK MOUNTING KIT INSTALLATION Place the right side inner slide assembly onto the instrument case with the handle towards the front of the instrument Insert two green headed screws through the holes in the slide assembly behind the handle and into the metric tapped holes in the side of the instrument Insert two green headed screws through the holes near the rear of the slide assem bly and into the metric tapped holes in the side of the instrument Insert the two SAE threaded screws re moved from the feet through the 90 tabs on the rear of the slide assembly and into the rear panel of the instrument Using the Phillips screwdriver tighten all screws holding the right side slide assem bly to the instrument chassis With the appropriate hardware install the outer slide assemblies onto the equip ment rack Lift the signal generator into position Align theinner and outer slide assem blies and slide the instrument into the rack Realign the hardware as needed for smooth operation WARNING Use two or more people to lift and move this equipment or use an equipment cart There is risk of back injury if this equipment is lifted by one person 693XXB OM INSTALLATION 2 6 PREPARATION FOR STORAGE SHIPMENT 693XXB OM PREPARATION FOR STORAGE SHIPMENT The following paragraphs give instructions
110. ENERAL INFORMATION 1 4 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 1 5 ELECTRONIC MANUAL 1 6 RELATED MANUALS 693XXB OM IDENTIFICATION NUMBER All Anritsu instruments are assigned a unique six digit ID number such as 875012 The ID number is imprinted on a decal that is af fixed to the rear panel of the unit Special order instrument configura tions also have an additional special serial number tag attached to the rear panel of the unit When ordering parts or corresponding with Anritsu Customer Service please use the correct serial number with reference to the specific in strument s model number i e Model 69347B Synthesized High Per formance Signal Generator Serial No 875012 This manual is available on CD ROM as an Adobe Acrobat Portable Document F ormat pdf file The file can be viewed using Acrobat Reader a free program that is also included on the CD ROM The file is linked such that the viewer can choose a topic to view from the displayed bookmark list and jump to the manual page on which the topic resides The text can also be word searched Contact Anritsu Customer Service for price and availability This is one of a four manual set that consists of an Operation Manual a GPIB Programming M anual a SCPI Programming M anual and a Maintenance Manual GPIB This manual provides information for remote opera Programming tion of the signal generator with Product Specific Manual commands sent from an external controller vi
111. EVEL ALC SELECT At the resulting menu display press Level The 693XXB is now in fixed non swept power level mode At the Level Menu press User Cal The User Level Cal menu below is displayed Flo 2 868 GEE GHz 1 20 Bee GHz Points Status Off User Level Cal i FM This menu lets you perform the following Create a power offset table Select a measurement frequency range edit the start and stop frequency parameters Select the number of points at which correction information is to be taken Apply a power offset table to the test setup First press the menu soft key to select the power offset table User 1 User 2 User 3 User 4 or User 5 that you wish to create Next set the measurement frequency range by pressing Edit Start or Edit Stop to open the start Flo or stop Fhi frequency parameter for editing Edit the current frequency using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the keypad and appropriate termination key When you have finished setting the open parameter close it by pressing its menu edit soft key again or by making another menu selection Then select the number of frequency points at which correction information is to be taken by press ing Edit Points to open the number of points pa rameter for editing Edit the current number of points using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new valu
112. FIED PERSONNEL AUX I O 25 pin connector that provides for single cable interface with another 69XXXA B and or 68XXXB C master slave operation and with other Anritsu instruments such as the Anritsu 56100A Sca lar Network Analyzer A connector pinout diagram is shown in Figure A 2 2 AM OUT Provides video modulating signal from the internal AM generator BNC connector HORIZ OUT Provides a OV to 10V ramp during all sweep modes regardless of sweep width In the CW mode provides a voltage between OV and 10V proportional to the full frequency range of the instrument When the CW Ramp is enabled connector provides a repetitive OV to 10V ramp BNC connector 509 impedance 4 10 MHz REF IN Accepts an external 10 MHz 100 Hz 0 to 10 dBm time base signal Automatically disconnects the internal high stability time base option if installed BNC connector 509 impedance Figure A 1 Rear Pand Series 693XXB Synthesized Signal Generator 1 of 2 A 2 693XXB OM REAR PANEL CONNECTORS 10 MHz REF OUT Provides a 0 5 Vp p AC coupled 10 MHz signal derived from the internal frequency standard of the signal generator BNC connector 50 impedance PULSE TRIGGER IN Accepts an external TTL compatible signal to pulse modulate the RF output signal or to trigger or gate the internal pulse generator BNC connector PULSE VIDEO OUT Provides video modulating sig
113. Frequency Press Edit F1 to open the frequency parameter then enter the new CW frequency using the keypad and appropriate terminator key To close the open frequency parameter press Edit F1 or make an other menu selection Selecting a Preset Frequency To select one of the preset frequencies for output press the main menu key FREQUENCY CONTROL The CW Frequency Control menu below is dis played ECH 1 2 000 mag B GHz Level Li 468 88 dBm This menu lets you perform the following Select preset frequencies FO F1 F2 M1 or M2 for output Gotothe frequency list menu to tag edit or output a frequency from the list Gotothe tagged frequencies menu select a tagged frequency for output 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM CW FREQUENCY OPERATION Frequency List To go to the Frequency List menu below press Freqs List This menu lets you tag edit or output a frequency from the list F2 70 000 00A ma B GH Use the cursor control key to select a frequency from the frequency list The selected frequency is high lighted in reverse video and displayed in full below the frequency list Press Tag to mark a selected frequency place an F in front of it If the frequency is already tagged pressing will untag it remove the F Tagging selected frequencies lets you quickly switch between them using the scan keys of the Tagged F requencies menu Pre
114. H A HP8757D SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER 4 die dr hee 7 20 Connecting the 693XXB tothe HP8757D 7 20 Setting Up the 693XXB 7 21 Initiating HP8757D SNA Operation 7 23 Appendix A Rear Pane Connectors 1 INTRODUCTION 4i noy mom RU Rok E RR E 1 2 REAR PANEL CONNECTORS 5 5 5 15 1 A 3 CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS 1 Appendix Performance Specifications 01 693XXB OM Chapter 1 General Information Table of Contents 1 1 SCOPE OF MANUAL 2 00 1 3 1 2 1 3 1 3 DESCRIPTION 1 3 1 4 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 1 5 1 5 ELECTRONIC MANUAL 4 5 4a amp oo OR 1 5 1 6 RELATED MANUALS 1 5 GPIB Programming Manual 1 5 SCPI Programming Manual 1 5 Maintenance Manual 1 6 1 7 OPTIONS iuh ete dB 1 6 1 6 PERFORMANCE 5 1 7 1 9 RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT 1 8 Figure 1 1 Series 693XXB Synthesized High Performance Signal Generator 1 1 scope oF MANUAL 1 2 inTRODUCTION 1 3 DESCRIPTION 693XXB OM Chapter 1 General Information This manual provides general information installation and operating information for the Anritsu Series 693XXB Synthesized High Perform ance Signal Generator Throughout this manual the terms 693XXB
115. ING MAINTENANCE STATUS MESSAGES Table 6 2 PossibleError Messages during Normal Operations 3 of 4 Error Message Description Bl Error Conditions 1 The internal M rate is set gt 100 kHz for a non sinewave modulating waveform square triangle or FM Frequency Range Multipliers ramp waveforms In units w Option 21B operating Frequency Range Multiplier 2 2 GHz current frequency rate gt 103 of maximum w Option 21B Digital Down Converter d ou Rate appears 10 15 625 MHz 256 AL Ne 1562532512 123 2 The internal M actual deviation is set for gt 3 45 31 25 62 5 MHz 64 radians or Frequency Deviation gt 5 MHz in Narrow mode 62 5 125 MHz 32 or gt 460 radians or Frequency Deviation gt 10 MHz in 125 250 MHz 16 Wide mode Frequency Deviation Actual Devia 250 500 MHz 8 tion in radians x Rate The message Reduce 500 1050 MHz 4 Deviation appears at the bottom of the M status dis 1050 2200 MHz 2 play Units w o Option21B 10 MHz 2 GHz 1 3 The external modulating signal exceeds the input voltage range gt 1 15V or lt 1 15 message Re 2 GHz 2 2 GHz w Opt 21B ae 05 1 duce FM Input Level appears at the bottom of the 20 GHz 40 GHz 0 5 status display atelier baits 0 25 4 The external actual deviation is set for
116. ION 693XXB OM FIXED POWER LEVEL OPERATION Use the cursor control key to select a power level from the level list The selected power level is high lighted in reverse video and displayed in full below the level list Press Tag to mark selected power level place an Lin front of it If a power level is already tagged pressing will untag it remove the L Tagging selected power levels lets you quickly switch be tween them using the scan keys of the Tagged Lev els menu Press Edit to edit the selected power level or enter a new power level Press Output Level to output the selected level This power level is output until you select another level from the list and press Output Level On the level list the output power level selection is marked by a black square or if tagged an L highlighted in reverse video When you are finished press Previous Menu tore turn to the Level Control Menu display Scanning Tagged Levels To goto the Tagged L ev els Menu below from the Level Control menu press Tag Lvl Menu 6 dEm E ELO TE EMI This menu lets you select the tagged power levels for output using the Scan Up and Scan Dn keys Return to the Level Control Menu display by press ing Previous Menu 3 51 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Level Offset When Offset is selected ON this status message is displayed on all menu displays to remind the opera tor that a constant
117. NEL OPERATION OPERATION Press Start Index to open the list sweep start index parameter Press Stop Index to open the list sweep stop index parameter Press Dwell Time to open the dwell time per step parameter Open the parameter you wish to change then edit the current value using the cursor control key or ro tary data knob or enter a new value using the key pad and appropriate termination key When you have finished setting the open parameter close it by pressing its menu soft key or by making another menu selection To go to the List Sweep Trigger menu from this menu press Trigger The trigger menu lets you se lec a list sweep trigger Press Previous Menu to return to the main List Sweep menu Selecting a There are four modes of sweep triggering in list List Sweep sweep frequency mode each selectable from the Trigger trigger menu Thefollowing is a description of each mode Auto Automatic The output sweeps be tween the specified list start and stop indexes dwelling at each list index for the specified dwell time External The output sweep recurs when trig gered by an external TTL compatible clock pulse to the rear panel AUX I O connector Single Trig A single output sweep starts when the trigger key is pressed If a sweep is in progress when the key is pressed it aborts and resets a Manual list sweep default trigger mode The list index is incremented or decremented by using the front pane
118. ONNECTION Interface Connector Cable Length Restrictions GPIB Interconnection ook a Setting the GPIB Address Selecting the Line Terminator Selecting the Interface Language RACK MOUNTING KITINSTALLATION Preliminary PP Procedure PREPARATION FOR STORAGE SHIPMENT Preparation for Storage Preparation for Shipment 2 1 inTRODUCTION gt 18 kg HEAVY WEIGHT 2 2 INITIAL INSPECTION 693XXB OM Chapter 2 Installation This chapter provides installation instructions for the Series 693XXB Synthesized High Performance Signal Generator It indudes informa tion on initial inspection preparation for use storage and reship ment and General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB setup and intercon nections WARNING Use two or more people to lift and move this equipment or use an equipment cart Thereis a risk of back injury if this equipment is lifted by one person Inspect the shipping container for damage If the shipping container or cushioning material is damaged retain until the contents of the shi p ment have been checked against the packing list and the signal gener ator has been checked for mechanical and electrical operation If the shipment is incomplete or if the signal generator is damaged mechanically or electrically notify your local sales represen
119. OTE You can also select any of the preset power levels or a power level sweep for a CW frequency For instructions refer to paragraphs 3 9 Fixed Power L evel Op eration and 3 10 Power Level Sweep Op eration 3 24 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM CW Ramp CW FREQUENCY OPERATION When active the signal generator s CW ramp pro vides a repetitive OV to 10V ramp output to the rear panel HORIZ OUT BNC connector and AUX I O con nector The CW ramp is used to drive a scalar ana lyzer display To goto the CW Ramp menu below from the CW menu press CW Ramp Menu This menu lets you set the ramp speed and turn the CW ramp on off To set ramp speed press Sweep Time The sweep time parameter opens for editing Edit the current sweep time using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new sweep time using the key pad and appropriate termination key The sweep time entered must bein the range of 30 ms to 99 sec To close the open sweep time parameter when you are done press Sweep Time again Press CW Ramp to turn the CW ramp on While the CW ramp is on the message CW Ramp pears on theright side of frequency title bar on all CW menus Press Previous Menu to return to the CW menu 3 25 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 8 SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION Pine icm i a eee Sele ee ee ee aie a ete In units with Option 21B perform in
120. PERATION n analog sweep frequency step power mode step sweep frequency step power mode a power level Step occurs after each frequency sweep The power level remains constant for the length of time re quired to complete each frequency sweep Available menus let you control the type of power level sweep linear or logarithmic the power level sweep range and step size To select an analog sweep frequency step power mode start with an analog sweep menu display to select a step sweep frequency step power mode start with a step sweep menu display Then press the main menu key LEVEL ALC SELECT At the resulting menu display press Lvl Swp The Level Sweep Menu is displayed B B 2 Bel Hz 26 606 mas Ba This menu lets you perform the following Select a power level sweep range edit the sweep start and stop power level parameters Gotothe sweep ramp menu set the step size or number of steps NOTE To select logarithmic or linear power level sweep or to select a power level sweep range refer to the procedures on pages 3 56 and 3 57 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT POWER LEVEL SWEEP OPERATION PANEL OPERATION Setting Power Therearetwo ways to set the step size of the power Level Step Size This error message is displayed when 1 the step size valueentered 15 greater than the level sweep range or 2 the number of steps en tered results in a step size of less than 0
121. Penlift to select normally open N O or normally closed N C contacts on the internal pen lift relay The penlift relay output optionally avail able at the rear panel is used to lift a plotter pen during retrace The display will reflect your selec tion Press Marker to select a 5V or 5V level for the video marker output when video markers are se lected ON The video marker signal output is avail able at the rear panel AUX I O connector The display will reflect your selection Press Previous Menu to return to the System Con figuration Menu display 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT SYSTEM PANEL OPERATION CONFIGURATION Configuring Configuring the RF of the 693XXB involves the fol the RF lowing Selecting whether the RF should be on or off during retrace Selecting whether the RF should be on or off during frequency switching in CW step sweep and list sweep modes Selecting whether a sweep triggered by a sin gle or external trigger should rest at the top or bottom of the sweep ramp Selecting whether the RF should be on or off at reset Setting the reference multiplier value for fre quency scaling Selecting 40 dB or 0 dB of attenuation when RF is switched off in units with a step attenua tor Option 2 installed To goto the Configure RF Menu below from the em Configuration menu press HF T Dr Eie Confia RF aL Retrace RF poi nelta F RF Ramp Rezt Press Retrace
122. QUENC CONTROL LEVEL ALC 5 SELECT Can Be Selected From Any Step Sweep Menu Display Edit Dwell Edit Start Frequency Time Edit End Frequency m un Edit Number __ Edit Current of Steps Power Level Edit Sweep Time Select Log or Linear Sweep gt Edit Alt Sweep Start Frequency End Frequency Edit Main Sweep Power Level Edit Alt Sweep Power Level SS SELECT REQUENC CONTROL LEVEL ALC SELECT LEVEL CONTROL l Tag Untag Highlighted Marker Frequency Edit Highlighted Marker Frequency N A Edit Start Frequency Edit End Frequency Edit Current Power Level Figure 4 4 Step Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map 4 8 NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 paragraph 3 8 for Step Sweep Frequency M ode operat ing instructions 693XXB OM LOCAL OPERATION MENU MAPS 693XXB OM CWSWEEP I Manual Swe E 2 909 009 goa 0 GHz F Edit Start Frequency 2 000 009 000 F2 Edit End Frequency _ LEVEL ALC Edit Step Size LEVEL Edit Number of Steps i PULSE CW SWEEP Swee 2 900 9 GHz Edit Start Frequency F Edit End Frequency SH SELECT CONTROL Edit Current Power Level NOTE 1 Refer to C
123. S TESTS Table 5 3 Power Levd Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 4 of 27 Model 69317B w Option 15B Serial No Date Model 69317B with Option 15B High Power without Option 2 Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency z 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 13 dBm dBm 17 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 16 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 15 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 14 dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 13 dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 6dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 4dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 13 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 13 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification 5 22 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Leve Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 5 of 27 Model 69317B w Option 15B Serial No Date Model 69317B with Option 15B High Power with Option 2A Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 11 dBm dBm 15 dBm dBm
124. SERIES 693XXB SYNTHESIZED HIGH PERFORMANCE SIGNAL GENERATOR OPERATION MANUAL Ainritsu 490 JARVIS DRIVE P N 10370 10348 MORGAN HILL CA 95037 2809 REVISION B PRINTED APRIL 2001 COPYRIGHT 1999 ANRITSU CO WARRANTY The Anritsu product s listed on the title page is are warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for one year from the date of shipment Anritsu s obligation covers repairing or replacing products which prove to be defective during the warranty period Buyers shall prepay transportation charges for equipment returned to Anritsu for warranty repairs Obligation is limited tothe original purchaser Anritsu is not liable for consequen tial damages LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty does not apply to Anritsu connectors that have failed due to normal wear Also the warranty does not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by the Buyer unauthorized modification or misuse or operation outside of the environmental specifi cations of the product No other warranty is expressed or implied and the remedies provided herein are the Buyer s sole and exclusive remedies TRADEMARK ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Adobe Acrobat is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems ncorporated NOTICE Anritsu Company has prepared this manual for use by Anritsu Company personnel and customers as a guide for the proper installation operation and maintenance of Anritsu Company equipment and co
125. X I O connector Single A single CW power sweep starts when thetrigger key is pressed If a sweep is in prog ress when the key is pressed it aborts and re sets To goto the CW Level Sweep Trigger M enu below from the CW L evel Sweep Ramp menu press Trigger Menu ECH Fa 3 988 BEE BEE B GHz To select a CW power sweep trigger mode press its menu soft key A message showing the CW power sweep trigger mode selected appears on the right side of the level mode title bar If you select the single sweep trigger mode the menu display adds the menu soft key Trig Press ing Trig starts a single CW power sweep If a single CW power sweep is in progress pressing Trig causes the sweep to abort and reset Press Previous Menu to return to the CW L evel Sweep Ramp menu 3 55 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Selecting a Power Level Sweep Range eee eee eee ee When Linear power level sweep is selected use the following termi nator keys for power level data entries GHz Sec dBm for V MHz ms dB for mV kHz us STEPS for uV 3 56 POWER LEVEL SWEEP OPERATION Selecting a power level sweep range consists of choosing a start and stop level for the power level sweep The power level sweep range selection pro cess is identical for all power level sweep modes CW power sweep analog sweep frequency step power and step sweep frequency step power
126. XB OM OPERATION CW FREQUENCY VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST 5 5 CW FREQUENCY The following test verifies that the CW frequency output of the signal ACCURACY TEST generator is within accuracy specifications Table 5 2 beginning on 5 7 contains test records that you can copy and use to record test results for this test Test records for standard 693XXB models are con tained in Table 5 2A test records for 693XXB models with Option 11 are contained in Table 5 2B 693XXB SIGNAL GENERATOR FREQUENCY COUNTER pand 3 Band 4 REP OUT 19 MHz npu i 2 gt gt gt gt coo tion o leesn mmm o YF Foo onneeuon Band2 Input RF OUT 26 5 to 65 GHz Connection A Mixer 0 01 to 26 5 GHz Figure 5 1 Equipment Setup for CW Frequency Accuracy Test Test Setup 693XXB OM Connect the equipment shown in Figure 5 1 as fol lows Step 1 Step 2 Connect the 693XXB rear panel 10 MHz REF OUT to the Frequency Counter 10 MHz External Reference input If the Frequency Counter has an INT EXT tog gle switch set it to EXT Connect the 693XXB RF OUTPUT tothe Frequency Counter RF Input as follows a For measuring frequencies of 0 01 to 1 0 GHz connect to the Band 2 input Connection A For measuring frequencies of 1 0 to
127. XB Synthesized High Performance Signal Generator Line Key Theline key provides for turning the signal gener ator on and off STANDBY off is indicated by an orange LED OPERATE on by a green LED Data Display The data display area consists of the data display Area and the surrounding menu keys Data Display The data display provides information about the current status of the 693XXB in a menu display for mat This includes the operating mode of the instru ment the value of the active frequency and power level parameters and the modulation status Menu Keys Menu keys provide for selecting the operating mode parameters and configuration of the signal gener ator 3 6 693XXB OM FRONT PANEL LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM Data Entry Area RF Output Control Key Connectors LAYOUT The data entry area consists of data entry keys and controls that provide for 1 changing values for each 693XXB parameter and 2 terminating the value entry and assigning the appropriate units GHz MHz dBm etc The RF output control key provides for turning the RF output power on and off OUTPUT OFF is indi cated by a red LED OUTPUT ON by a yellow LED The front panel has both input and output connec tors Modulation Connectors The modulation connectors provide for applying ex ternal AM FM M or Pulse modulation to the RF output signal External ALC Connector The external ALC connector provides for leveli
128. XB contains an Option 16 high stability time base connect the coaxial cable in step 2 between the693XXB rear panel 10 MHz REF OUT connector and the 360B rear panel 10 MHz REF IN connector 7 12 Modes of Operation Source Lock Mode USE WITH A 360B VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER nector Connect the other end to the 360B rear panel 10 MHz REF OUT connector Step 3 Connect one end of a GPIB cable 1 meter in length to the 693XXB rear panel IEEE 488 GPIB connector Connect the other end of the cable to the 360B rear panel SOURCE CONTROL SYSTEM BUS connector Step 4 on the 693XXB and configure it as described in the following paragraphs There are two 360B VNA receiver modes of opera tion that are used with the 693XXB the 360B source lock mode and the 360B tracking mode The configuration and operation of the signal generator for both modes of operation are described in the fol lowing paragraphs When operating in source lock mode the 360B phase locks the frequency output of the signal gen erator This is accomplished by sending a dc control voltage to the FM input on the 693XXB Frequency resolution is limited to 100 kHz intervals This is be cause of the inherent resolution of the 360B s syn thesized local oscillators Source Lock Mode Configuration In order for the 693XXB to operate with a 360B in source lock mode the signal generator must be placed in the SS Mode of operation To place the s
129. XB in the analog sweep frequency mode and display the Analog Sweep Menu c With the Analog Sweep menu dis played press the main menu key FREQUENCY CONTROL The Sweep F requency Control menu below is displayed d Press Full to select a full range fre quency sweep e Press Edit L1 to open the current power level parameter for editing f Set L1 tothe power level noted on the test record g Now return to the Analog Sweep menu by pressing the main menu key CW SWEEP SELECT 693XXB OM 5 17 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS h At the Analog Sweep menu press the menu soft key Sweep Ramp to goto the Analog Sweep Ramp menu i Press Sweep Time to open the sweep time parameter for editing j Setthe sweep time to 99 seconds NOTE Monitor the 693XXB s Horizontal Output on the Oscilloscope to de termine sweep start and stop Step4 During the analog sweep measure the maximum and minimum Power M eter readings and record the values on the test record Verify that the variation differ ence between the maximum and mini mum readings does not exceed the value noted on the test record 5 18 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Leve Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 1 of 27 Model 69317B Serial No Date Model 69317B without Option 2 Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Fre
130. XB to the HP8757D Setting up the 693XXB Initiating HP8757D SNA Operation 7 1 intropuction 693XXB OM Chapter 7 Use With Other Instruments This chapter provides information and instructions for using the Series 693XXB Synthesized High Performance Signal Generator with other instruments It contains the following Q Instructions for interconnecting and operating any two 69XXXA B and or 68XXXB C instruments in a master slave configuration a Instructions for connecting the 693XXB to a Anritsu Model 56100A Scalar Network Analyzer so that it can be used as signal source for the analyzer Q Instructions for connecting the 693XXB toa Anritsu Model 360B Vector Network Analyzer and configuring the signal generator so that it can be used as a signal source for the analyzer a Instructions for connecting the 693XXB to a Giga tronics Model 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer and setting up the signal gener ator so that it can be used as a signal source for the analyzer a Instructions for connecting the 693XXB to a Hewlett Packard Model 8757D Scalar Network Analyzer and setting up the signal generator so that it can be used as a signal source for the ana lyzer USE WITH MASTER SLAVE OTHER INSTRUMENTS OPERATION 7 2 MASTER SLAVE Master slave operation consists of connecting any two 69XXXA B OPERATION and or 68XXXB C instruments together and configuring them so that they produce CW and synchronized swept o
131. a the IEEE 488 General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB It contains a general description of the GPIB and bus data transfer and control functions a complete list ing and description of all 693XXB GPIB Product Specific commands and several programming exam ples TheAnritsu part number for the GPIB Pro gramming Manual is 10370 10349 SCPI This manual provides information for remote opera Programming tion of the signal generator with Standard Com Manual mands for Programmable Instruments SCPI commands sent from an external controller via the IEEE 488 General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB It contains a general description of the GPIB and bus data transfer and control functions a complete list ing and description of each command in the 693XXB SCPI command set and examples of command us age The Anritsu part number for the SCPI Pro gramming Manual is 10370 10350 GENERAL INFORMATION 1 7 options 1 6 OPTIONS Maintenance The Maintenance Manual supplies service informa Manual tion for all models in the 693XXB series The service information includes functional circuit descriptions block diagrams performance verification tests cali bration procedures troubleshooting data and as sembly and component removal replacement procedures The Anritsu part number for the Main tenance Manual is 10370 10351 The following options are available Option 1 Rack Mounting Rack mount kit containing a set of track slides 90 t
132. age 5 19 FLATNESS TESTS contains test records that you can copy and use to record test results for these tests Test records are provided for each 693XXB model con figuration 693XXB SIGNAL GENERATOR OSCILLOSCOPE HORIZ _ OUT Ee E 5 e en zm RF CH 1 or X Input OUT Power POWER METE Sensor 00 000 000 00000 Figure 5 2 Equipment Setup for Power Level Accuracy and F latness Tests Test Setup Connect the equipment shown in Figure 5 2 as fol lows Step 1 Calibrate the Power Meter with the Power Sensor NOTE For lt 40 GHz models use the MA2474A power sensor for 240 GHz models usetheM A2475A power sensor Step2 Connect the Power Sensor to the RF OUT PUT of the 693XXB Step3 Connect the 693XXB rear panel HORIZ OUT to the Oscilloscope 1 input X in put NOTE Before starting these procedures locate the test record in Table 5 3 for the particular 693XXB model configuration being tested 693XXB OM 5 13 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Power Level Power level accuracy is checked by stepping the Accuracy Test power down in 1 dB increments from its maximum Procedure rated power level Step1 Set up the 693XXB as follows a Reset the instrument by pressing a then Reset The CW Menu below is displayed b Press Edit Fi to open the current fre quency parameter for editing c Set F1tothe CW frequenc
133. age Native T M Increment Mode On Off Set Frequency Increment Set Power Level Increment Set Time Increment Figure 4 15 System Configuration Menu Map 4 19 4 20 Chapter 5 Operation Verification Table of Contents 5 1 5 3 5 2 TEST EQUIPMENT x 5 3 5 3 TEST RECORDS 5 3 5 4 INITIAL 693XXB CHECKOUT xS 5 4 POWE UD 6 doxes 5 4 Self Test 5 4 Resetting the Signal Generator 5 4 5 4 5 5 CW FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST 5 5 Test SUP uu o aos de ox E ox we me 5 5 Test Procedure 5 6 5 6 POWER LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS C 5 13 Test Set p ETT 5 13 Power Level Accuracy Test Procedure 5 14 Power Level Flatness Test Procedure 5 15 5 1 INTRODUCTION 5 2 TEST EQUIPMENT 5 3 TEST RECORDS 693XXB OM Chapter 5 Operation Verification This chapter contains three tests that can be used to verify the opera tion of the Series 693XXB Synthesized High Performance Signal Gen erator Setup instructions and performance procedures are included for each test The results can be compared with the specified limits that are shown on the test record forms that are provided for each test Table 5 1 lis
134. and signal generator will be used interchangeably to refer to the in strument Manual organization is shown in the table of contents This chapter contains general information about the series 693XXB signal generator It includes a general description of the instrument and information on its identification number related manuals op tions and performance specifications A listing of recommended test equipment is also provided The Series 693XXB Synthesized High Performance Signal Generators are microprocessor based synthesized signal sources with high resolu tion phase lock capability They generate both discrete CW frequencies and broad full range and narrow band sweeps across the frequency range of 10 MHz to 65 GHz All functions of the signal generators are fully controllable locally from the front panel or remotely except for power on standby via the I EEE 488 General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB The series presently consist of seven models covering a variety of fre quency ranges and power levels Table 1 1 on the following page lists models frequency ranges and maximum leveled output 1 3 GENERAL 693XXB INFORMATION Table 1 1 Series 693XXB Modds MODELS Output Power 693XXB Output Power A Model Frequency Output Power w Step Attenuator w Electronic Step Attenuator 69317B 0 01 8 4 GHz 13 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 9 0 dBm 69337B 2 0 20 0 GHz 13 0 dBm 11 0 dBm 3 0 dBm 693
135. anel FM OUT BNC Rear Panel PULSE VIDEO OUT BNC Rear Panel PULSE SYNC OUT BNC Rear Panel AUX I O 25 pin D type Rear Panel SERIAL I O RJ45 Rear Panel IEEE 488 GPIB Type 57 Rear Panel AM IN Accepts an external signal to amplitude modulate the RF output signal Front or rear panel input 509 or 6002 impedance both selectable from front panel modulation menu FM M IN Accepts an external signal to frequency phase modulate the RF output signal Front or rear panel input 500 or 6000 impedance both selectable from front panel modulation menu B 12 PULSE TRIGGER IN Accepts an external TTL compatible signal to pulse modulate the RF output signal or trigger or gate the internal pulse generator Front or rear panel input selectable from front panel modulation menu EXT ALC IN External ALC Input Provides for leveling the RF output signal externally with either a detector or power meter Signal requirements are shown in the RF Out put specifications on page B 7 RF OUTPUT Provides for RF output from 509 impedance source K and V Connector female Option 9 moves the RF Output connector to the rear panel 10 MHz REF IN Accepts an external 10 MHz 100 Hz 0 to 10 dBm time base signal Automatically disconnects the internal high stability time base option if installed 509 impedance 10 MHz REF OUT Provides a 0 5 Vp p AC coupled 10 MHz signal derived from the internal frequency standard 509 impedance HORIZ OUT
136. aster slave operation a Slave unit is coupled to a Master instrument that is con nected to a Model 360B Vector Network Analyzer in a source or dual source configuration Operating in structions for the vector network analyzer can be found in the Model 360B VNA Operation Manual P N 10410 00110 The following paragraphs de scribe how to set up both 69XXXA B and or 68XXXB C instruments to perform master slave op erations in the VNA mode Place both instruments in CW mode Then on the Master unit press Master Slave to goto the Master Slave Menu display page 7 5 At the Master Slave menu press Slave Fregs to go tothe Slave Frequencies List Menu display next page USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS During master slave operations in VNA mode this error message is displayed on the Master instru ment whenever the slave offset value entered results in CW fre quency or frequency sweep outside the range of the Slave unit Enter inga valid offset valueclearstheer ror MASTER SLAVE OPERATION Fa 3 5 Fo 8 01 3 2 8 Press Menu to go tothe VNA Menu display below Lewe This menu lets you set the frequency offset and out put power level for the Slave instrument in the VNA mode Press VNA Offset to open the slave frequency offset parameter Press VNA Level to open the slave output power level parameter Open the parameter you wish to change
137. at it passes self test and resetting it to the factory default parameters Power Up Self Test Resetting the 693XXB Warmup Time 5 4 First verify that the rear panel line voltage selector is set for the correct line voltage then connect the 693X XB to the power source This automatically places the signal generator in operation front panel OPERATE LED on During power up the signal generator loads its op erating program then returns to the exact setup it was in when last turned off Next perform a self test of the signal generator to insure proper operation of the instrument PCBs and other internal assemblies To self test the instrument first press ASUA then press Selftest When the self test is complete the signal generator displays the main CW menu NOTE Error conditions detected during self test are displayed as error messages on the data display They should be corrected before continuing Refer to Chapter 6 for a listing of error messages and descrip tions The 693XXB should be reset to the factory sel ected default parameters before commencing operation verification testing reset the instrument first press RASAN then press Reset The signal generator resets to the CW frequency mode and displays the CW Menu When the signal generator is turned on allow one hour of warmup time before performing operational verification testing This will assure stable opera tion of the instrument 693X
138. ate lt 2 typical Harmonic Distortion 1 MHz dev n 10 kHz rate 196 Frequency Range Divide Ratio n 10 MHz to 15 625 MHz 256 515 625 MHz to 31 25 MHz 128 gt 31 25 MHz to 62 5 MHz 64 62 5 MHz to 125 MHz 32 gt 125 MHz to lt 250 MHz 16 gt 250 MHz to 500 MHz 8 gt 500 MHz to 1050 MHz 4 gt 1050 MHz to 2200 MHz 2 693XXB OM PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS PHASE MODULATION M Option 6 External Input Front or rear panel BNC shares the FM input 509 or 6000 input impedance All options se lectable from modulation menu Sensitivity Continuously variable from 0 0025 radi ans per volt to 5 0 radians per volt Narrow mode 0 25 radians per volt to 500 0 radians per volt Wide mode selectable from modulation menu Deviation Narrow Mode The lesser of 3 radians or 10 MHz rate Wide Mode The lesser of 400 radians or 10 MHz rate Bandwidth sine wave Narrow Mode DC to 10 MHz Wide Mode DC to 1 MHz Flatness Narrow Mode DC to 1 MHz rates 1 dB Wide Mode DC to 500 kHz rates 1 dB Accuracy at 100 kHz sine wave 10 Input Level 1V full scale 2V absolute maximum INTERNAL M GENERATOR Shares the Internal FM Generator Waveforms Sine square triangle positive ramp negative ramp Gaussian noise uniform noise user defined Rate 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz for square triangle an
139. ation appears at the bottom of the status display 3 86 SIGNAL MODULATION The External M Status Menu below is then dis played On Sensitivity 1 688 rad wae Impedance Su E d ounce Mode Deviation This menu contains the external M status window that shows the current menu selections and the measured M Deviation The M deviation meas urement function measures the voltage of the external modulation signal and calculates the peak frequency deviation The menu lets you perform the following Turn on and off Set the M Sensitivity Select the input impedance 6000 or 50Q of the input connector Select the input connector front panel or rear panel FM M IN that is connected to the exter nal signal source Press On Off to turn M on and off The External status display will reflect your selection as On or Off the modulation status area will reflect your selection as Ext On or Off Press Edit Sens to open the M Sensitivity pa rameter then edit the current value using the cur sor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the keypad and the GHz Sec dBm termi nator key The M Sensitivity range is 0 0025 radi ans V to 5 radians V for Narrow mode and 0 25 radians V to 500 radians V for Wide mode To close the open Sensitivity parameter press Edit Sens or make another menu selection Press 6009 50
140. ators External AM and FM capability re mains unchanged Not available in combination with Op tions 6 or 8 Option 8 Internal Power Measurement Adds an inter nal power measurement function that is compatible with An ritsu 560 7 5400 71 or 6400 71 series detectors Not available in combination with Option 7 693XXB OM Option 9 Rear Panel RF Output Moves the RF output connector to the rear panel Option 10 User Defined Modulation Capability Pro vides user defined waveform capability for complex modula tion Requires computer controller not included Includes cable and Windows based software Not available in com bination with Option 7 Option 11 0 1 Hz Frequency Resolution Provides fre quency resolution of 0 1 Hz Option 14 Rack Mounting without Chassis Slides Modifies rack mounting hardware to install unit in a console that has mounting shelves Includes mounting ears and front panel handles Option 15B High Power Output Adds high power RF components to the instrument in the 2 20 GHz frequency range Option 15B is standard in models having a high end frequency that is gt 40 GHz Option 16 High Stability Time Base Adds an ovenized 10 MHz crystal oscillator as a high stability time base Option 17A Delete Front Panel Deletes the front panel for use in remote control applications where a front panel display and keyboard control are not needed Option 18 mmWave Module Bias Output Provides bias output f
141. beled on the Master and Slave instruments SNA to the rear panel AUX I O connector on the 56100A SNA and Step 3 Connect one end of a coaxial cable to the 2 connect a dedicated system bus rear panel 10 MHz REF OUT connector on cable P N 2100 1 between the the Master instrument Connect the other i Master instrument rear panel end to the rear panel 10 MHz REF IN con IEEE 488 GPIB connector and the nector on the Slave instrument 56100A SNA rear panel DEDI CATED GPIB connector i 7 4 693XXB OM USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS NOTE Master slave operations areal ways initiated in the CW frequency mode Once initiated you then can instrument 693XXB OM change to a sweep frequency mode of operation by selecting the de sired frequency modeon the Master Initiating Master Slave Operation MASTER SLAVE OPERATION Step 4 Connect the Master unit RF OUTPUT and the Slave unit RF OUTPUT to the appro priate connections on the DUT The following paragraphs describe how to set up both instruments to perform master slave opera tions Use the CW Frequency Mode menu map Chapter 4 Figure 4 2 to follow the menu se quences To initiate master slave operation turn on both in struments and place them in CW mode The CW Menu below is displayed Level L 8 dBm AM Analog On the Master instrument press Master Slave to go to the Mast
142. ble the analog sweep frequency mode at sweep times of lt 1 second To output markers during a sweep you must first select tag the marker frequencies from the Marker List menu then turn on the marker output To goto the Marker List menu from an analog or step sweep frequency menu press FREQUENCY CONTROL The Sweep Frequency Control menu below is dis To go to the Marker List menu from this menu press Marker List The Marker List menu next page is displayed This menu lets you tag or edit marker list frequencies and turn the markers on off 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION Use the cursor control key to select a frequency parameter from the marker list The selected fre quency parameter is highlighted in reverse video and displayed in full below the marker list Editing a Marker List Frequency If you want to change a selected marker list fre quency parameter s value press Edit This opens the frequency parameter and lets you edit the cur rent frequency or enter a new frequency Tagging a Marker List Frequency Only frequencies on the marker list that have been tagged can be output as markers during a sweep Press Tag to tag a selected frequency parameter place an m in front of it If a frequency parameter is already tagged pressing Tag will untag it re move the m Activating Markers The soft keys Video Markers and Intensity Markers toggle the
143. ched Filter Indicates a failure in the 8 4 13 25 GHz switched filter path within the switched fil ter assembly The 693XXB may or may not produce an RF output in this frequency range Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the instrument in this condition Error 134 13 25 20 GH Switched Filter Indicates a failure in the 13 25 20 GHz switched filter path within the switched filter assembly The 693XXB may or may not produce an RF output in this fre quency range Use caution and always determine the output power level when op erating the instrument in this condition Error 135 Modulator or Driver Failed Indicates a failure of the modulator in the switched filter assembly or the modulator driver circuitry on the A9 PCB The 693XXB may or may not produce an RF output Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the in strument in this condition 6 6 693XXB OM ERROR AND WARNING STATUS MESSAGES OPERATOR MAINTENANCE Table6 1 Self Test Error Messages 4 of 4 Error Message Description Remarks Error 138 SDM Unit or Driver Failed Indicates a failure of the switched doubler module SDM or SDM bias regulator cir cuitry on the A14 PCB The 693XXB is still operable but it will not produce an RF output in the 20 40 GHz frequency range Error 139 32 40 GHz SDM Section Failed Indicates a failure in the 32 40 GHz switched
144. cifications are provided in Appendix B Table 1 3 lists the recommended test equipment for performing the Se ries 693XXB Synthesized Signal Generator operation verification tests in Chapter 5 Table 1 3 Recommended Test Equipment 1 8 Instrument Critical Specification Recommended Manufacturer Model Frequency Range 0 01 to 65 GHz EIP Microwave Inc Models 538B Counter Input Z 502 548B or 578B with Resolution 1 Hz with Cable Kit Other External Time Base Cable Kit Option 590 and Input and External Mixer External Mixer Option 91 26 5 to 40 GHz Option 92 40 to 60 GHz Option 93 60 to 90 GHz Power Meter with Range 30 to 20 dBm 1uW to 100 mW Anritsu Models ML2437A or ML2438A with Power Power Sensors Sensors MA2474A 0 01 to 40 GHz MA2475A 0 01 to 50 GHz Oscilloscope Bandwidth DC to 150 MHz Tektronix Inc Model TAS485 Vertical Sensitivity 2 mV division Horiz Sensitivity 50 ns division 693XXB OM Chapter 2 Installation Table of Contents 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 6 1 1 5 PREPARATION FORUSE Power Requirements Line Voltage Selection Power Connection 0 0 a Standby Operation Warmup Time 4 6 4 2 0 6 3 44 x Operating Environment GPIB SETUP AND INTERC
145. cted during op eration the 693XXB displays an error message to indicate that the output is abnormal or that a signal input or data entry is invalid It also displays warn ing messages to alert the operator to conditions that could cause an inaccurate signal generator output Status messages to remind the operator of current menu selections or settings are also generated Ta ble 6 2is a summary list of possible error messages that can be displayed during normal operations Ta ble 6 3is a summary list of possible warning status messages Table 6 2 PossibleError Messages during Normal Operations 1 of 4 Error Message Description Displayed on the frequency mode title bar when 1 the output frequency is not phase locked 2 an invalid frequency parameter entry causes a frequency range error or 3 an invalid pulse parameter entry causes a pulse modulation error LOCK ERROR Displayed in the frequency parameters area when the output frequency is not phase locked The frequency accuracy and stability of the RF output is greatly reduced Normally caused by an internal component failure Run self test to verify malfunction Displayed in the frequency parameters area when 1 the analog sweep start frequency entered is greater than the stop frequency 2 the dF value entered results in a sweep outside the range of the instrument 3 the step size value entered is greater than the sweep range 4 the number of steps
146. d Quadruplet that are available from the pulse generator Use the cursor control key to highlight the desired pulse mode then select it by pressing Select The Internal Pulse Status display will reflect your selection Press Previous Menu to return to the previous In ternal Pulse Status Menu display At the additional Internal Pulse Status menu press Trigger to go to the Trigger Mode Selection Menu below H Triggered a Triggered w delau F Composite Trigger B Polarity This menu lets you select the mode of triggering the internal pulse generator Each trigger mode is de scribed and illustrated on page 3 91 Use the cursor control key to highlight the desired trigger mode then press Select to select it The Internal Pulse Status display will reflect your selec tion When you select the Gated Triggered or Triggered w delay mode the menu display adds the menu soft keys Trig 1 and Trig Press these keys to select whether the pulse generator is triggered by therising or falling edge of the external trigger pulse Press Previous Menu to return to the previous Internal Pulse Status Menu display 3 90 693XXB OM Free Run The pulse generator produces Single Doublet Triplet or Quadru plet pulse modulation waveforms at the internal pulse repetition rate Pulse de lay D1 is not available in this trigger mode Delayed The pulse generator produces Single Doublet Triplet or Quadruplet pulse modula
147. d de scriptions are listed in the Operator Maintenance chapter of this manual CAUTION During self test with RF OUTPUT set to ON the output power level is set to 0 dBm Always disconnect sensitive equipment from the unit before performing self test Resetti ng to Default Parameters 693XXB OM You can perform a self test of the signal generator at any time during normal operation To perform a self test from any menu press 131 Then when the System M enu below is displayed press Selftest Ch Fi 2 208 BEG Bm amp GHz 8 06 dBm AEN PULSE Selftest You can reset the 693XXB to the factory sel ected de fault parameter values at any time during normal operation The default parameters are shown in Ta ble 3 1 on the following page NOTE Resetting the instrument dears the setup presently in place If these parameter val ues are needed for future testing save them as a stored setup before resetting the signal generator For information on saving recalling instrument setups refer to paragraph 3 14 To reset the signal generator press KASHANI When the System Menu above is displayed press Reset 3 15 LOCAL FRONT RESET DEFAULT PANEL OPERATION PARAMETERS Table 3 1 Series 693XXB Reset Default Parameters 1 of 2 MODEL FREQUENCY PARAMETERS GHz NUMBER FO F1 F2 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 MO M1 M2 M4 M5 M6 M7 M8
148. d ramp wave forms Resolution 0 1 Hz Accuracy Same as instrument timebase Output BNC connector rear panel A User defined waveforms are available with Option 10 User Defined Modulation Capability In external mode accuracy applies at 1V input 693XXB OM Units with Option 21B Digital Down Converter At frequecies from 10 MHz to 2 2 GHz the following specifications apply Above 2 2 GHz the specifications in the left column apply In the following specifications n is the divide ratio from the table below Sensitivity Narrow Mode Continuously variable from 0 0025 radians V to 5 radians V n selectable from modulation menu Wide Mode Continuously variable from 0 25 radiians V to 500 radians V n selectable from modulation menu Deviation Narrow Mode DC to lesser of 8 MHz or 0 03 x rier rates The lesser of 3 radians or 5 MHz mod rate n Wide Mode DC to lesser of 1 MHz or 0 03 x Fcarrier rates The lesser of 400 radians or 10 MHz mod rate n Bandwidth 3 dB Narrow Mode 100 kHz rate DC to lesser of 10 MHz or 0 03 x Fcarrier Wide Mode 100 kHz rate DC to lesser of 1 MHz or 0 03 x Fcarrier FM Flatness Narrow Mode DC to lesser of 1 MHz or 0 01 x Fcar rier rates 1 dB relative to 100 kHz rate Wide Mode DC to lesser of 500 kHz or 0 01 x Fcar rier rates 1 dB relative to 100 kHz rate Accuracy at 100 kHz sine wave 1096
149. dB per step electronic attenuator with a 120 dB range for models hav ing a high end frequency of lt 20 GHz Output power is selected di rectly in dBm on the front panel or via GPIB Rated RF output power is reduced Option 6 Phase Modulation M Adds phase modulation capa bility The internal FM generator becomes the FM M generator Not available in combination with Option 7 693XXB OM GENERAL PERFORMANCE INFORMATION SPECIFICATIONS 693XXB OM Option 7 Delete AM FM Generator Deletes the internal AM and FM generators External AM and FM capability remains un changed Not available in combination with Option 6 or 8 Option 8 Internal Power Meter Adds an internal power meter that is compatible with Anritsu 560 7 5400 71 or 6400 71 series de tectors Not available in combination with Option 7 Option 9 Rear Panel RF Output Moves the RF output connector tothe rear panel Option 10 User Defined Modulation Capability Provides user defined waveform capability for complex modulation Requires a computer controller not included Includes cable and Windows based software Not available in combination with Option 7 Option 11 0 1 Hz Frequency Resolution Provides frequency resolution of 0 1 Hz Option 14 Rack Mounting without Chassis Slides Modifies rack mounting hardware to install unit in a console that has mount ing shelves Includes mounting ears and front panel handles Option 15B High Po
150. dB up to 149 dB with Option 2 for CW and sweep frequency operations Instruments with Option 15B provide leveled output power over a maximum range of up to 27 dB up to 141 dB with Op tion 2 The following paragraphs describe how to place the signal gen erator in fixed non swept power level mode select a power level for output select logarithmic or linear units and activate level offset Use the Fixed Non Swept Power Level Mode menu map Chapter 4 Fig ure 4 7 to follow the menu sequences Selecting Fixed Power Level Mode Selecting a Power Level To place the 693XXB in a fixed power level mode from a CW or sweep analog step or manual fre quency menu press the main menu key LEVEL ALC SELECT At the resulting menu display press Level The Level Menu below is displayed 5 000 BEG A GHz FH ELewel Ll ofr ERE UP fset ALC Loor User This menu lets you perform the following Edit the power level parameter Edit thelevel offset parameter a Turn level offset on off There are several ways to select a power level for output You can 1 edit the current power level 2 enter a new power level or 3 select one of the 10 preset power level parameters Editing the Current Power Level Press Edit L1 to open the power level parameter then edit the current power level using the cursor control key or the rotary data knob To dose the open power lev
151. digit under the open parameter The rotary data knob or the and v touch pads will increment or decrement the digit position over the cursor Controlled parameters are frequency power level sweep time dwell time and number of steps Keypad entries are terminated by pressing the appropri ate unit key GHz Sec dBm MHz ms dB kHz us STEPS or Hz ns ADRS Edits are terminated by exiting the edit menu Reset Returns all instrument parameters to predefined de fault states or values Any pending GPIB I O is aborted Se lectable from the system menu Master Slave Operation Allows two output signals 69XXXA B and or 68XXXB C to be swept with a user selected frequency offset One instrument controls the other via AUX I O and SERIAL I O connections Requires a Mas ter Slave Interface Cable Set Part No ND36329 User Level Flatness Correction Allows user to calibrate out path loss due to external switching and cables via en tered power table from a GPIB power meter or calculated data When user level correction is activated entered power levels are delivered at the point where calibration was per formed Supported power meters are Anritsu ML2437A ML2438A and ML4803A and HP 437B 438A and 70100A Five user tables are available with up to 801 points table Warm Up Time From Standby 30 minutes From Cold Start 0 C 120 hours to achieve specified frequency stability with aging Instruments disconnected from ac line power for
152. doubler filter path within the SDM The 693XXB is still operable but it will not produce an RF output in the 32 40 GHz frequency range Error 140 25 32 GHz SDM Section Failed Indicates a failure in the 25 32 GHz switched doubler filter path within the SDM The 693XXB is still operable but it will not produce an RF output in the 25 32 GHz frequency range Error 141 20 25 GHz SDM Section Failed Indicates a failure in the 20 25 GHz switched doubler filter path within the SDM The 693XXB is still operable but it will not produce an RF output in the 20 25 GHz frequency range Error 142 Indicates a failure of the sample and hold circuitry on the A10 PCB The 693XXB Sample and Hold Circuit still operates normally but the RF output may be unleveled during pulse modulation Failed Error 143 Indicates a failure of the level slope DAC on the A10 PCB The 693XXB still oper Slope DAC Failed ates normally but RF output level flatness may be affected during frequency sweeps Error 144 RF was Off when Selftest started Some tests were not performed Indicates that some self tests were not performed because RF Output was selected OFF on the 693XXB front panel Press the OUTPUT key to turn RF Output ON and run the instrument self test again Error 145 AM meter or associated circuitry failed Indicates a failure of the internal AM circuitry and loss of the capability to provide amplitude modulation
153. e Selecting Sweep Range Selecting a Power Level Frequency Markers Selecting Alternate Sweep Mode List Sweep Mode Selecting List Sweep Mode Editing the List Selecting a List Sweep Range Selecting List Sweep Trigger FIXED POWER LEVEL OPE RATION Selecting Fixed Power Level Mode Selecting a Power Level Level Offset POWER LEVEL SWEEP OPERATION Selecting CW Power Sweep Mode Setting CW Power Sweep Step Size and Dwell Time Selecting CW Power Sweep Trigger Selecting a Power Level Sweep Range Selecting a Sweep F requency Step Power LEVELING OPERATIONS Selecting a Leveling Mode Attenuator Decoupling ALC Power Slope User Cal User Level Flatness Correction SIGNAL MODULATION Amplitude Modulation Operating Modes Providing Amplitude Modulation Frequency Modulation Operating Modes Providing Frequency Modulation Phase Modulation Operating Modes Providing Phase Modulation Pulse Modulation Operating Modes Providing Pulse Modulation 3 54 3 56 3 58 3 59 3 60 3 60 3 64 3 65 3 67 3 73 3 73 3 73 3 78 3 78 3 83 3 83 3 87 3 88 iii Table of Contents Continued 3 13 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 3 04 64 2444 3 96 Configuring the Fr
154. e or ramp waveforms The message Reduce Rate appears at the bot torm of theAM status display Am plitude modulation of the output signal will continue but the modu lating waveform may be distorted sine wave EN square wave Pid positive ramp AK negative ramp GN Gaussian noise UN uniform noise triangle wave 693XXB OM SIGNAL MODULATION This menu contains the internal AM status window that shows the current menu selections This menu lets you perform the following Turn AM on and off Set the AM Depth Set the AM Rate Go to the Modulation Waveform Selection menu B B E Press On Off to turn AM on and off The Internal AM status display will reflect your selection as On or Off the AM modulation status area will reflect your selection as I nt On or Off Press Edit Depth to open the AM Depth parameter then edit the current value using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the keypad and the appropriate terminator key kHz us STEPS for Linear MHz ms dB for Log The AM Depth range is 0 100 in Linear 0 25 dB in Log To close the open AM Depth parameter press Edit Depth or make another menu selection Press Edit Rate to open the AM Rate parameter then edit the current value using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the keypad and the appropriate terminator
155. e data entry keypad and theterminator key HZ ns ADRS The new GPIB address will appear on the display To change the data terminator press Line Term to select the correct GPIB data delimiter Press SS Mode toturn on SS mode This places the 693XXB in a source lock mode The signal generator is now configured for 360B source lock mode operati on Initiating 360B Source Lock Mode Operations Turn on the 360B and configure it for source lock mode of operation Refer to the 360B VNA opera tion manual Once configured the 360B takes con trol of the signal generator When the 360B takes control the display of all pa rameters on the 693XXB is disabled and the mes sages SS MODE Secure Mode Active and Remote appear on the front panel display 7 13 USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS 7 14 Tracking Mode USE WITH A 360B VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER Terminating 360B Source Lock Mode Opera tions To terminate 360B VNA source lock mode opera tions you must first return the 693XXB to local con trol and then turn off the SS M ode Toreturn the 693XXB to local control turn off the 360B VNA On the 693XXB press 191 then Reset This turns off the Secure mode Next press 8 then Config to access the System Configuration Menu display At the System Configuration Menu press GPIB When the Configure GPIB Menu shown below is displayed press SS Mode toturn the SS mode off When operating in tracking mode the 360B
156. e using the keypad and the STEPS termination key The number of point 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION When a power offset table is se lected ON this status message is displayed on all menu displays to remind the operator that user level flatness correction has been applied totheALC 693XXB OM LEVELING OPERATIONS s range is 2 to 801 When you have finished setting the open number of points parameter close it by pressing Edit Points again or by making another menu selection Now press Start Cal to begin automatically taking power level correction information at each frequency point During this process the menu displays the status Calibrating along with the current measure ment frequency point NOTE Toterminate the measurement process at any time before completion press Abort Once the power offset table has been created it is stored in non volatile memory The power offset ta ble is now ready to be applied to the test setup Dis connect the Power Sensor and Power Meter from the test setup Applying User Level Flatness Correction Whenever user level flatness correction is applied to thetest setup by activating the power offset table the set power level is delivered at the point where the calibration was performed To activate the selected power offset table and apply user level flatness correction to the test setup press On Off The User Level Cal menu will display the status
157. ect setting Whenever the selector setting is changed the line fuse must be changed tothe correct value for the line voltage selected Line fuse values for the line voltages are printed on the rear panel next tothe fuse holder WARNING When supplying power to this equipment always use three wire power cable connected to a three wire power line outlet If power is supplied without grounding the equip ment in this manner there is a risk of receiving a severe or fatal electric shock Power Connection Connecting the 693XXB to line power automatically places it in operation front panel OPERATE LED on To connect it to the power source plug the fe male end of the power cable into the input line volt age receptade on the rear panel Figure 2 1 Then plug the male end of the power cord into a three wire power line outlet 693XXB OM INSTALLATION PREPARATION FOR USE Line 4 Fuse gt K TON N Line Voltage Selector Switch 3 GPIB Connector LEVEL CONTROL MODULATION SYSTEM OPERATE LINE STANDBY Line Key 693XXB OM Figure 2 1 Standby Operation Signal Generator Rear Pand showing Power Connection Whenever the signal generator is not being used it should be left connected to the power source and placed in standby This keeps the internal timebase frequency reference at operating temperature On the front panel press LINE to
158. editing consists of editing list index frequency and power level parameters and inserting and delet ing list index entries To goto the Edit List menu below from the List Sweep menu press Edit List Fr GEE Bee B GHz List Index Level Lu 8 88 dEm i nn SERI ODE PULSE IDEEN Ui Bnalog This menu lets you perform the following Q GototheList Frequency Edit menu edit list index frequency parameters GototheList Power Edit menu edit list index power level parameters Gotothe additional Edit List menu insert and delete list index entries 3 43 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 44 SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION List Frequency Edit to go to the List Frequency Edit menu below press Edit Freq This menu lets you scroll through the list frequencies and edit se lected The menu displays total of 20 frequencies The index range of the displayed frequencies is shown at the top of the list Use the cursor control key to select a frequency from the list The selected fre quency is highlighted in reverse video and displayed in full below the frequency list Press Edit to edit the highlighted frequency or en ter a new frequency Press Page Up to scroll the displayed frequencies tothe next 20 in thelist Press Page Down to scroll the displayed frequencies tothe previous 20 in the list Press Previous Menu to return to the Edit List menu List Power Edit to gotothe List P
159. el Offset 3 52 Power Measurement Internal Option 8 3 110 Power Requirements 2 4 Preparation for Storage Shipment 2 13 Preparation for Use 2 4 Line Voltage Selection 2 4 Operating Environment 2 6 Power Requirements 2 4 Standby Operation 2 5 Warmup Time 2 6 Pulse Modulation M ode Menu Map 4 18 Operating Modes 3 87 Providing Pulse Modulation 3 88 693XXB OM Rack Mounting Kit Option 1 Installation Procedures 2 10 Rear Panel Connectors A 1 Recommended Test Equipment 1 8 Reference Oscillator Calibration 3 108 Reset Default Parameters 3 16 3 17 S Saving Recalling Instrument Setups 3 105 Scope of Manual 1 3 Secure Operation 3 107 Self Test Error Messages 6 3 6 7 From System Menu 3 15 Specifications Performance B 1 SS Mode Operation 7 12 Start Up 3 14 Display 3 14 Step Sweep Frequency Mode Description 3 29 Menu Map 4 8 Selecting a Power Level 3 35 Selecting a Sweep Range 3 33 Selecting a Sweep Trigger 3 28 Selecting Alternate Sweep 3 38 Selecting Linear or Logarithmic Sweep 3 31 Selecting Step Sweep Mode 3 29 Setting Dwell Time 3 29 Setting Step Size 3 29 Setting Sweep Time 3 29 Using Frequency Markers 3 36 Sweep Frequency Modes Analog Sweep Frequency 3 26 List Sweep Frequency M ode 3 26 Manual Sweep Frequency Mode 3 26 Step Sweep Frequency M ode 3 26 Sweep F requency Step Power Mode Menu Map 4 13 Selecting a Sweep F requency Step Pow
160. el parameter press Edit L1 or make another menu selection Entering a New Power Level Press Edit L1 to open the power level parameter then enter the new power level using the keypad 3 49 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION When Linear power level units selected use the following termi nator keys for power level data entries GHz Sec dBm for V MHz ms dB for mV kHz us STEPS for uV 3 50 FIXED POWER LEVEL OPERATION and appropriate terminator key To close the open power level parameter press Edit make an other menu selection Selecting a Preset Power Level To select one of the preset power levels for output press the main menu key LEVEL CONTROL The Level Control Menu below is displayed This menu lets you perform the following a Select preset power levels LO L1 L2 L3 or L4 for output a Gotothe Level List menu a Go tothe Tagged Levels menu a Select Logarithmic or Linear units Press Log Linear to select power level units When Log is selected units are dBm when Linear is se lected units are mV The soft key label is high lighted in reverse video to reflect your selection Level List To go to the Level List Menu below press Level List Level List L LS amp L amp Ch Hi mes 78 00 ES This menu lets you select a power level from the list to tag edit or output 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERAT
161. en displays the cur rent frequency parameters for the selected sweep range If you wish to change a frequency parameter use the menu edit soft key to open the parameter then edit it 3 39 LOCAL FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY PANEL OPERATION OPERATION When you are done selecting the alternate sweep range press Previous Menu to return tothe Alter nate Sweep menu Selecting an Alternate Sweep Power L evel To goto the Alternate Level menu shown below from the Alternate Sweep menu press Alt Level Select the power level for the alternate sweep range LO L1 L2 L3 or L4 The menu then displays the current level parameter for the selected power level If you wish to change the level use the menu edit soft key to open the parameter then edit it A menu edit soft key is also provided to let you change the power level of the main sweep CAUTION Performing alternate sweeps using power levels that cross step attenuator switch points can cause excessive wear on the switches and reduce the life expectancy of the step attenuator When you are done selecting the power level for the alternate sweep range and editing the power level of the main sweep press Previous Menu to return to the Alternate Sweep menu 3 40 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY PANEL OPERATION OPERATION List Sweep In list sweep frequency mode the RF output is a Mode step sweep of up to 2000 phase locked non sequential frequ
162. encies Each frequency can havea different power level setting The list index 0 thru 1999 identifies each frequency power level set in the list The list sweep is defined by a list start in dex and list stop index There are four modes of sweep triggering in list sweep automatic external single and manual When automatic external or single trigger mode is selected the output sweeps between the specified list start and stop indexes dwelling at each list in dex for the specified dwell time When manual trig ger mode is selected the list start index list stop index and dwell time parameter are not used In stead the list index is incremented or decremented by using the front panel cursor control key man ual trigger mode the list index can also be incre mented by using an external trigger input Each TTL trigger increments the list index by one After a reset the list sweep defaults to manual trig ger mode The data display shows thetrigger mode the list index current frequency and current power level Thelist index specifies the current location within the list The current frequency is preceded by the text Fr The current power level is preceded by thetext Lv When automatic external or single trigger mode is selected the data display changes to show the trigger mode and list sweep start and stop index values only The list of up to 2000 frequency power level sets is stored in non volatile RAM to pr
163. ency Accuracy Test Record for Models with Option 11 3 of 3 Model693 B Serial No Date 69387B 69397B 2 000 000 000 0 2 000 000 000 0 6 000 000 000 0 6 000 000 000 0 10 000 000 000 0 10 000 000 000 0 14 000 000 000 0 14 000 000 000 0 18 000 000 000 0 18 000 000 000 0 22 000 000 000 0 22 000 000 000 0 26 000 000 000 0 26 000 000 000 0 30 000 000 000 0 30 000 000 000 0 34 000 000 000 0 34 000 000 000 0 38 000 000 000 0 38 000 000 000 0 42 000 000 000 0 42 000 000 000 0 46 000 000 000 0 46 000 000 000 0 50 000 000 000 0 50 000 000 000 0 54 000 000 000 0 54 000 000 000 0 58 000 000 000 0 58 000 000 000 0 60 000 000 000 0 62 000 000 000 0 65 000 000 000 0 2 000 000 100 0 2 000 000 100 0 2 000 000 200 0 2 000 000 200 0 2 000 000 300 0 2 000 000 300 0 2 000 000 400 0 2 000 000 400 0 2 000 000 500 0 2 000 000 500 0 2 000 000 600 0 2 000 000 600 0 2 000 000 700 0 2 000 000 700 0 2 000 000 800 0 2 000 000 800 0 2 000 000 900 0 2 000 000 900 0 2 000 001 000 0 2 000 001 000 0 Specification for all frequencies listed above is 10 Hz All frequencies are in GHz 5 12 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS 5 6 POWER LEVEL These tests verify that the power level accuracy and flatness of the sig ACCURACY AND nal generator meet specifications Table 5 3 beginning on p
164. enu below is displayed Li dBm i nn O F F RE Press Save then enter the desired setup number between 0 and 9 on the keypad The setup is now saved NOTES Setup 0 automatically saves the current front panel settings when the instrument is shutdown using the front panel LINE key Therefore it is recommended that you use only setups 1 through 9 to save front panel setups When instrument shutdown occurs be cause of main power interruptions the current front panel settings are not saved Torecall a previously saved setup first access the Setups Menu as described above At the Setups Menu press Recall then enter the setup number on the keypad The instrument resets itself to the recalled configu ration 693XXB OM 3 105 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION The master reset function over writes all information stored in the non volatile memory with default values This includes the table of 2000 frequency power level sets used for the list sweep mode thefive power offset tables usedfor the user level flatness correction function 3 106 Erasing Stored Setups SAVING RECALLING INSTRUMENT SETUPS The front panel setups are stored in non volatile memory A master reset is required to erase the con tents of the setups and reprogram them with default data To perform a master reset proceed as follows Step 1 With the 693XXB in
165. ep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 11 dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 11 dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification 5 24 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Leve Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 7 of 27 Model 69337B Serial No Date Model 69337B without Option 2 Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power 13 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 7dBm dBm 6dBm dBm 5 dBm 4 dBm 3 dBm 2 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 13 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 13 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification 693XXB OM 5 25 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Leve Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 8 of 27 Model 69337B Serial No Date Model 69337B with Option 2A Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power 11 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 5 d
166. equency Counter reading Step 5 Repeat step 4 until all frequencies listed on thetest record have been recorded 693XXB OM 1 000 000 000 2 000 000 000 4 000 000 000 6 000 000 000 8 000 000 000 2 000 001 000 2 000 002 000 2 000 003 000 2 000 004 000 2 000 005 000 2 000 006 000 2 000 007 000 2 000 008 000 2 000 009 000 2 000 010 000 2 000 000 000 5 000 000 000 8 000 000 000 11 000 000 000 14 000 000 000 17 000 000 000 20 000 000 000 2 000 001 000 2 000 002 000 2 000 003 000 2 000 004 000 2 000 005 000 2 000 006 000 2 000 007 000 2 000 008 000 2 000 009 000 2 000 010 000 Specification for all frequencies listed above is 100 Hz All frequencies are in GHz OPERATION CW FREQUENCY VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST Table 5 2A CW Frequency Accuracy Test Record for Standard Modds 1 of 3 Model693 B Serial No Date 69317B 69337B 69347B 693XXB OM 5 7 OPERATION CW FREQUENCY VERIFICATION ACCURACY TEST Table 5 2A CW Frequency Accuracy Test Record for Standard Modds 2 of 3 Model693 B Serial No Date 69367B 69377B 2 000 000 000 5 000 000 000 8 000 000 000 11 000 000 000 14 000 000 000 17 000 000 000 20 000 000 000 23 000 000 000 26 000 000 000 29 000 000 000 32 000 000 000 35 000 000 000 38 000 000 000 40 000 000 000 2 000 001 000 2 000 002 000 2 000 003 000 2 000 004 000
167. equency parameter Edit the open frequency parameter using the cursor control key or the rotary data knob When you are finished close the open parameter by pressing its menu edit soft key or by making another menu se lection Entering New Start Stop Frequencies To enter a new frequency sweep range open either the start or stop frequency parameter press Edit F1 or Edit F2 Enter a new frequency using the keypad and appro priate terminator key When you are finished close the open parameter by pressing its menu edit soft key or by making another menu selection 3 33 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 34 SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION Selecting a Preset Sweep Range There are four preset sweep range parameters se lectable in the analog sweep step sweep and man ual sweep frequency modes The following is a description of each preset sweep range F1 F2 provides a frequency sweep between the start frequency F 1 and the stop frequency F 2 F3 F4 provides a frequency sweep between the start frequency F3 and the stop frequency F 4 F5 dF provides a symmetrical frequency sweep about the center frequency F5 The sweep width is determined by the dF frequency parameter Q F6 dF provides a symmetrical frequency sweep about the center frequency F6 The sweep width is determined by the dF frequency parameter To select one of the preset sweep ranges from any sweep frequency mode menu press the main menu
168. equency entered is not greater than the stop frequency 2 the dF value entered does not try to set the frequency sweep outside the range of the signal generator 3 the step size entered is not greater than F2 minus F 1 4 the number of steps entered does not result in a step sizethat is smaller than the resolution of the instrument or 5 the step sweep time and number of steps does not result in a dwell time of 10 ms Q Enter a valid sweep start frequency dF value step size Step sweep time or number of steps If the error message remains displayed call a service technician 6 15 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 6 4 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ROUTINE MAINTENANCE Routine maintenance that can be performed by the operator consists of cleaning the fan filter cleaning the data display and replacing a de fective line fuse Cleaningthe The signal generator must always receive adequate FanFilter ventilation A blocked fan filter can cause the in strument to overheat and shut down Check and dean the rear panel fan honeycomb filter periodi cally Clean the filter more frequently in dusty envi ronments Clean the filter as follows Step1 Removethefilter guard from the rear panel by pulling out on the four panel fas teners holding them in place Figure 6 1 Step2 Vacuum the honeycomb filter to clean it Step 3 Install the filter guard back on the rear panel Step4 Pressin the panel fasteners to secure the filter
169. er M ode 3 58 Selecting a Sweep Range 3 56 Selecting Linear or Logarithmic Sweep 3 57 Setting Step Size 3 59 System Configuration Configuring the Front Panel 3 97 Configuring the GPIB 3 101 Configuring the Rear Panel 3 98 Configuring the RF 3 99 Index 3 SUBJECT INDEX u Frequency Scaling 3 99 u MenuMap 419 Use With Other I nstruments Setting ncrement Sizes 3 104 Master Slave Operation 7 4 T Use with a 360B Vector Network Analyzer 7 11 Use with a 56100A Scalar Network Analyzer Test Equipment 1 8 5 3 7 10 Testing Operational Verification Use with a 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer CW Frequency Accuracy 5 5 7 16 Initial 693XXB Checkout 5 4 Use With a HP8757D Scalar Network Analyzer Power Level Accuracy and F latness 5 13 7 20 Test Equipment 5 3 Test Records 5 3 5 7 5 12 5 19 5 45 Troubleshooting Tables 6 13 6 15 Index 4 693XXB OM
170. er Slave Menu display below CH Fi 2 888 meas cag B GHz ETT L 8 dBm SE Sma PULSE 0 This menu lets you perform the following Gotothe Slave Frequencies List menu Set the dF frequency for the Slave unit Set the Slave unit s main power level L 1 Set the alternate sweep power level L2 for the Slave unit a Turn master slave operation on and off Press Slave Fregs to go to the Slave F requencies List menu next page USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS NOTE Upon reset the slave frequencies FO F9 and MO M9 return tothe default values shown here MASTER SLAVE OPERATION Fa 3 5 Fo 8 8 This menu lets you edit the listed frequencies for the Slave instrument Use the cursor control key to select a frequency pa rameter from the list then press Edit to edit its value Edit the current frequency parameter value using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the key pad and appropri ate termination key Press Edit again to close the open frequency parameter When you are finished editing the slave frequencies press Previous Menu to return to the Master Slave menu below The Master Slave menu lets you set the dF fre quency and L1 and L2 power level parameters for the Slaveinstrument Press Slave DF to open the dF frequency parame ter Press Slave L1 to open the main power level pa rameter Press Slave L2
171. erform a self test of the signal generator by pressing the System Menu soft key Selftest If self test does not result in an error message s resume normal operation If an error message s is displayed call a service techni cian 6 14 693XXB OM OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 693XXB OM TROUBLESHOOTING Table 6 4 Troubleshooting 3 of 3 is Displayed Trouble Description This message is displayed to indicate that the RF output is unleveled Step 1 Check that the output power does not exceed the specified leveled power rating and that the RF OUTPUT connector is terminated into 500 load Reduce the power level to not exceed the specified leveled power rating or terminate the RF OUTPUT connector with a 50Q load If error message remains displayed call a service techni cian is Displayed Trouble Description This message is displayed in the frequency pa rameters area to indicate that 1 the analog sweep start frequency en tered is greater than the stop frequency 2 the dF value entered re sults in a sweep outside the range of the instrument 3 the step size value entered is greater than the sweep range 4 the number of steps entered results in a step size of less than 1 kHz 0 1 Hz with Option 11 or 0 1 dB 0 001 mV or 5 the step sweep time entered divided by the number of steps entered results in a dwell time of 10 ms Step 1 Check that 1 the analog sweep start fr
172. es Analog Sweep Frequency 3 26 CW Frequency Mode 3 21 List Sweep Frequency M ode 3 26 Manual Sweep Frequency Mode 3 26 Step Sweep Frequency Mode 3 26 Frequency Scaling 3 99 Front Panel Connectors 3 7 Data Display Area 3 8 Data Entry Area 3 12 Description 3 6 Layout 3 6 G General Description 1 3 General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB Address 2 7 Cable Length Restrictions 2 7 Interface Connector 2 7 Line Terminator 2 9 Native Interface Language 2 9 SCPI Interface Language 2 9 Setup and Interconnection 2 7 I Identification Number 1 5 Initial Inspection 2 3 L L evel Offset 3 52 Leveling Operations ALC Power Slope 3 65 Attenuator Decoupling 3 64 External Leveling 3 61 Fixed Gain 3 63 Internal Leveling 3 61 Menu Map 4 14 Index 2 G M Selecting a Leveling Mode 3 60 User Cal User Level Flatness Correction 3 67 List Sweep Frequency Mode Description 3 41 Editing the List 3 43 Menu Map 4 10 Selecting a Sweep Range 3 46 Selecting a Sweep Trigger 3 47 Selecting List Sweep Mode 3 42 M Maintenance Routine Display Cleaning 6 16 Fan Filter Cleaning 6 16 Line Fuse Replacement 6 17 Manual Sweep Frequency Description 3 32 Menu Map 4 9 Selecting a Power Level 3 35 Selecting a Sweep Range 3 33 Selecting Manual Sweep M ode 3 32 Manual Electronic 1 5 Manual GPIB Programming 1 5 Manual Maintenance 1 6 Manual SCPI Programming 1 5 Markers
173. eserve any settings after the instrument is powered off The list is not stored with the other setup information in the in strument After a master reset the list is reset to its default state of 2000 index entries of 5 GHz at 0 dBm 693XXB OM 3 41 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 42 Selecting List Sweep Mode SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION To place the 693XXB in list sweep frequency mode press the main menu key CW SWEEP SELECT At the resulting menu display press List The List menu below is displayed Fr 5 B List Index Lu 888 dBm This menu lets you perform the following Gotothe Edit List menus edit list index fre quency and power level parameters and insert and delete list index entries Edit thelist index parameter Calculate all list index frequency and power level settings Gotothe Sweep menu set sweep start index stop index and dwell time and select a sweep trigger Editing the List Index Press List Index to open the list index parameter for editing Edit the current list index value using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the key pad and any termination key When you have finished setting the open pa rameter closeit by pressing List Index again or by making another menu selection The List Index soft key is not the only way to changethe list index In the List Sweep mode with Manual trigger selected each
174. ess Manual The Manual Sweep menu below is then displayed B B GHz BEE aa Fm 7 006 BB Haa A This menu lets you perform the following a Select a sweep range edit the start and stop frequency parameters a Set the step size or number of steps previously described on page 3 30 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION This error message is displayed when 1 the analog sweep start fre quency entered is greater than the stop frequency or 2 the dF value entered results in a sweep outside therange of the instrument Enter ingvalid values will dear theerror 693XXB OM Selecting a Sweep Range SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION Selecting a sweep range involves choosing a start and a stop frequency for the frequency sweep The sweep range selection process is identical for the analog sweep step sweep and manual sweep fre quency modes You can select a frequency sweep range as follows Edit the current start and stop frequency pa rameter values Enter new start and stop frequency parameter values Select one of the preset sweep range parame ters F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 dF or F6 dF Editing the Current Start Stop Frequencies To edit the current frequency sweep range open either the start or stop frequency parameter the display above Edit F1 opens the start frequency parameter and Edit F2 opens the stop fr
175. esultant minimum dwell time must be gt 10 ms to allow for phase locking of each step fre quency The sweep time of the step sweep can be set for any time in the range of 20 ms to 99 sec To goto the Step Sweep Ramp menu below from the Step Sweep menu press Sweep Ramp This menu lets you set the dwell time the step size in linear step sweep the number of steps and goto the additional step sweep ramp menu to set the sweep time select log or linear sweep and select a sweep trigger Press Dwell Time to open the dwell ti me per step parameter Press Step Size to open the step size parameter Press of Steps to open the number of steps parameter 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION Open the parameter you wish to change then edit the current value using the cursor control key or the rotary data knob or enter a new value using the key pad and appropriate termination key When you have finished setting the open parameter close it by pressing its menu soft key or make another menu selection Press More to goto the additional Step Sweep Ramp menu Press Previous Menu to return to the Step Sweep menu Additional Step Sweep Ramp Menu When you press More the additional Step Sweep Ramp menu below is displayed This menu lets you set the sweep time select loga rithmic or linear step sweep and to the trigger menu To open the sweep time parameter f
176. fault data 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 12 sicwAL SIGNAL MODULATION The signal generator provides AM FM M Option 6 and pulse modulation of the output signal using modulating signals from either theinternal AM FM and pulse generators or external sources FM and are operationally exclusive therefore only the AM FM or and pulse modulation modes can be active simultaneously The following paragraphs provide descriptions and operating instructions for each modulation mode Use the Amplitude Modulation M ode F re quency Modulation M ode Phase Modulation Mode and Pulse Modula tion Mode menu maps Chapter 4 Figures 4 11 4 12 4 13 and 4 14 to follow the menu sequences Amplitude Modulation Operating Modes Providing Amplitude Modulation 693XXB OM The signal generator has two AM operating modes Linear AM and Log AM In Linear AM mode sensitivity is continuously variable from 0 99V to 100 V The amplitude of the RF output changes linearly as the AM input changes In Log AM mode sensitivity is continuously vari able from 0 dB V to 25 dB V The amplitude of the RF output changes exponentially as the AM input changes The following are the menu selections to provide amplitude modulation of the output signal using a modulating signal from both the internal AM gener ator and an external source Press vie Mj At the resulting menu d
177. for preparing the 693XXB for storage or shipment Preparation for Storage Preparation for Shipment Preparing the signal generator for storage consists of cleaning the unit packing the inside with mois ture absorbing desiccant crystals and storing the unit in a temperature environment that is main tained between 40 C and 75 C To provide maximum protection against damage in transit the signal generator should be repackaged in the original shipping container If this container is no longer available and the unit is being returned to Anritsu for repair advise Anritsu Customer Serv ice they will send a new shipping container free of charge In the event neither of these two options is possible instructions for packaging and shipment are given below Usea Suitable Container Obtain a corrugated cardboard carton with a 125 kg test strength This carton should have inside di men sions of less than 15 cm larger than the unit di mensions to allow for cushioning Protect the I nstrument Surround the unit with polyethylene sheeting to protect the finish Cushion the Instrument Cushion the instrument on all sides by tightly pack ing dunnage or urethane foam between the carton and the unit Provide at least three inches of dun nage on all sides Seal the Container Seal the carton by using either shipping tape or an industrial stapler Address the Container If the instrument is being returned to Anritsu for
178. for the value of a parameter to be changed Parameter the parameter must first be opened To open the frequency parameter from the above menu press Edit F1 The menu display now changes to show that the menu soft key Edit F1 has been pressed and that the frequency parameter has been opened An open parameter is indicated by placing it in a window with a movable cursor under its digits Only one parameter can be open at a time If you press Edit L1 then the frequency parameter will dose and the power level parameter will open 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Editing the Current Value Cursor Control Key OY YY Rotary Data Knob 693XXB OM ENTERING DATA To change the current value of a parameter by edit ing you can use either the cursor control key or the rotary data knob Using the Cursor Control Key Using the lt and gt pads of the cursor control key move the cursor under the digit where you want to begin editing Then increase or decrease the value of the parameter using the or v pad of the cursor control key The unit size of the increase or decrease that occurs each time the or v pad is pressed is de termined by the cursor position Using the Rotary Data Knob You can also increase or decrease the value of the parameter using the rotary data knob Once you have positioned the cursor under the digit where you want to begin editing slowly turn the knob clockwise or counter d ock
179. g analog sweeps between 0 01 and 2 2 GHz the sweep is phase lock corrected as follows For sweep widths of gt 25 MHz phase lock correction occurs at both the start and stop frequencies and at each bandswitch point For sweep widths of lt 25 MHz only thecenter frequency of the sweep is phase lock corrected 3 26 SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION The signal generator can generate broad full range and narrow band sweeps across the frequency range of the instrument The 693XXB has four sweep frequency modes analog sweep step sweep manual sweep and list sweep Descriptions and operating instructions for the analog step and manual sweep frequency modes begin on this page List sweep frequency mode descriptions and operating instructions be gin on page 3 41 Use the Analog Sweep Step Sweep Manual Sweep and List Sweep Frequency Mode menu maps Chapter 4 Figures 4 3 4 4 4 5 and 4 6 to follow the menu sequences Analog Sweep In analog sweep frequency mode the 693XXB s Mode output frequency is swept between selected start and stop frequencies Sweep width can be set from 1MHztothefull frequency range of the signal generator Sweep time can be set for any time in the range of 30 ms to 99 sec The lower frequency limit for analog sweeps is 10 MHz When the sweep width of the analog sweep is 2100 MHz the sweep is phase lock corrected at both the start and stop frequencies and at each band sw
180. g separately by decoupling the step attenuator from the AL C The ALC mode menu lets you select attenuator de coupling At the ALC Mode menu press Atten Menu The Attenuator Menu below is displayed Analog Su F1 Fz 8 88 dBm Atten 58 ALE ModdALE Laar Uzer Cal This menu lets you decouple the step attenuator from the ALC set the power level and set the at tenuation in 10 dB steps Press Decouple to decouple the step attenuator from the ALC Press Edit L1 to open the power level parameter for editing Edit the current level using the cursor con trol key or rotary data knob or enter a new value us ing the key pad and appropriate termination key When you have finished setting the power level press Edit L1 to dose the open parameter To change the attenuation setting press Incr Atten or Decr Attn Pressing these soft keys changes the attenuation in 10 dB steps Press Previous Menu to return to the ALC M ode menu 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT LEVELING PANEL OPERATION OPERATIONS ALC Power The ALC power slope function lets you compensate Slope for system cable and waveguide variations due to changes in frequency This is accomplished by line arly increasing or decreasing power output as the frequency increases As shown in the following illus tration the power slope function provides you with the ability to set both the power slope and the pivot point The ALC loop menu lets you activate the ALC p
181. gnal source the Internal FM Status Menu below is displayed Dos ation Haa B KHzff 16 868 KHz This menu contains the internal FM status window that shows the current menu selections This menu lets you perform the following Turn FM on and off Q SettheFM Deviation Q SettheFM Rate GototheModulation Waveform Selection menu Press On Off to turn FM on and off The Internal FM status display will reflect your selection as On or Off the FM modulation status area will reflect your selection as Int On or Off Press Edit Dev to open the FM Deviation parame ter then edit the current value using the cursor con trol key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the keypad and the appropriate terminator key The FM Deviation range is 10 kHz to 20 MHz for Locked Locked Low Noise and Unlocked Nar row FM modes and 100 kHz to 100 MHz for Un locked Wide FM mode To close the open FM Deviation parameter press Edit Dev or make an other menu selection Press Edit Rate to open the FM Rate parameter then edit the current value using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the keypad and the appropriate terminator key The FM raterangeis 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave and 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz for square triangle and ramp waveforms To dosethe open FM Rate parameter press Edit Rate or make another menu selection 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION
182. guard tothe rear panel Filter Guard Panel Fastener 4 LA S55 LLL SSS wx se 2222222 LA SS LA 222 22 552 5 2 Figure 6 1 Removing Replacing theFan Filter Guard Cleaning the Data Display 6 16 The data display of the signal generator is protected by a plastic display filter To clean the display filter use mild soap or detergent and water or a commer cial window cleaner When cleaning use a soft lint free cloth Do not use abrasive cleaners tissues or paper towels which can scratch the plastic surface 693XXB OM OPERATOR ROUTINE MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE Replacing the value of the line fuse used in the 692XXB Line Fuse 693XXB is determined by the line voltage selec tion a 5A type T fuse for 110 Vac line voltage a 2 5A type T fuse for 220 Vac line voltage These line fuse values are printed on the rear panel next to the fuse holder WARNING Before changing the fuse always remove the power cord from the power outlet There is the risk of receiving a fatal electric shock if the fuse is replaced with the power connected Always use a new fuse of the type and rating specified by the fuse markings on the rear panel of the instrument Fuse Holder Figure6 2 Replacing theLineFuse Step 1 Disconnect the signal generator from the power source Step 2 Using a small flat blade screwdriver turn
183. hapter 3 paragraph 3 8 for Manual Sweep Frequency M ode operat ing instructions MANUAL SWEEP FREQUENCY MODE Figure 4 5 Manual Sweep Frequency M ode Menu Map 4 9 LOCAL OPERATION LIST SWEEP MENU MAPS FREQUENCY MODE Edit Highlighted Index Frequency Press To Display Next 20 Frequencies On List Press To Display Previous 20 Frequencies On List Edit Highlighted ___ Index Power Level Press To Display Next 10 Power Levels On List Press To Display Previous 10 Power Levels On List 5 aaa 800 l AN T Index 8 ge 0 00 dBm EAM FM Sa PULSE DIXA Analog J Step J Manual List 9004 Ht imago 5 88 49 020 dBm Insert Default Frequency And Power Level at Current List Index Delete Current List Index Leuel L Su z Lv 48 00 dBm Fr 5 000 aaa aaa GHz List Index CONTROL o6 GB OF 6 E Edit List Index CH Analog Step Manual Press to Calculate the Settings for All List Index Frequencies and Power Levels LEVEL ALC SELECT LEVEL CONTROL EX SYSTEM E List v HET ee lanua Edit Start Index Selects Auto Trigger 5 000 666 GHz dex 8 aoa Su st Sw 5 Gi In Lise Index 8 Edit Stop Index Se
184. he 360B and configure it for tracking mode of operation Refer to the 360B VNA operation man ual Once configured the 360B should take control of the signal generator When the 360B takes control the display of all pa rameters on the 693XXB is disabled and the mes sages Secure Mode Active and Remote appear on the front panel display Terminating 360B Tracking Mode Operations Toterminate 360B VNA tracking mode operations you must first return the 693XXB to local control and then turn off the Secure mode Toreturn the 693XXB to local control turn off the 360B VNA On the 693XXB press 191 then Reset This turns off the Secure mode and returns the signal generator to local control 693XXB OM 7 15 USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS 7 5 USE WITH A 8003 USE WITH A 8003 SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER The 693XXB signal generator is compatible with the Gigatronics SCALAR NETWORK Model 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer SNA The following para ANALYZER graphs provide instructions for connecting the 693XXB to the 8003 SNA and setting up the signal generator so that it can operate as a signal source for the analyzer Operating instructions for the scalar network analyzer can be found in the Giga tronics Model 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer Operation Manual SEQ SYNC BLANKING INPUT HORIZ OUT SWEEP IN PULSE TRIGGER IN AC MOD OUT IEEE 488 GPIB
185. i mum deviation is the lesser of 400 radians or 10 MHz rate for DC to 1 MHz rates NOTE FM and can not be active simultane ously FM and M sharethe same front and rear panel input connectors and in ternal signal generator The following are the menu selections to provide phase modulation of the output signal using a modulating signal from both the internal M gener ator and an external source Press At the resulting menu dis play press The main Status Menu below is displayed or Deviation Emm Hawe Mode Now press the menu soft key More The additional Status Menu below is diaplayed on Deviation 1 668 rad Em n Hawe Mode 100 008 8 kHz ua 3 83 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 84 SIGNAL MODULATION This menu lets you perform the following Select the modulating signal source Select the operating mode Narrow or Wide Press Ext to select the source of the modulating signal Int selects the modulating signal from the in ternal generator E xt selects the modulating signal from an external source The M status dis play will reflect your selection Next select the operating mode Press Narrow to select the Narrow M operating mode press Wide to select the Wide operating mode The FM status display will reflect your selection Press Previous Menu to return to the Main
186. ies but it does not affect the output of the signal generator For example Frequency scaling set to 4 CW frequency set to 20 GHz 693XXB output frequency is 5 GHz 20 GHz 4 Press Freq Scaling to open the reference multiplier parameter then edit the current value using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the data entry key pad and any ter minator key To close the open multiplier parameter press Freq Scaling or make another menu selection Press Term RF Off to select 40 dB minimum of at tenuation when RF is switched off in units with a step attenuator Option 2 installed This provides a better output source match The display will reflect Yes to indicate the 40 dB of attenuation is applied Press Term RF Off again to select dB of attenua tion when the RF is switched off The display will reflect No to indicate 0 dB of attenuation is applied Press Previous Menu to return to the main Config ureRF Menu display 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM SYSTEM CONFIGURATION The GPIB configuration menus let you perform the following Set the GPIB address and select the GPIB line terminator for the signal generator a Turn on the source lock mode for operation with a Model 360B Vector Network Analyzer Select the model and set the GPIB address for the power meter that is used to create a user level flatness correction power offset table Select the exter
187. ignal generator in SS Mode first press the main menu key At the System Menu display press Config The System Configuration Menu shown below is displayed C Fi 2 888 aaa aaa GHz Level Li Confial Setups Secure 1 At the System Configuration menu press GPIB 693XXB OM USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS When SS Mode is selected on this message is displayed in the fre quency mode title bar on all menu displays to remind the operator that the 693XXB is in a source lock mode A 360B VNA anda 69337B Sourcein SS Mode should not be operated be low 2 1 GHz because it may fail to lock A 360B VNA that is using 3612A 3613A 3622A 3623A or 3631A Test Set and a 693XXB Source in SS Mode should not be operated above 60 GHz because it will fail to lock For operations above 60 GHz the 693XXB Source in tracking mode 693XXB OM USE WITH A 360B VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER The Configure GPI B Menu shown below is dis played ECH Config GFIE E GPIB Address GP 55 Mode OFF IB Terminator Verify that the GPIB address and terminator shown on the display match the System Bus source address and data terminator that are set on the 360B VNA If the GPIB address of the 693XXB needs changing press GPIB Address Enter the new address using the cursor control key or th
188. ilt capability mounting ears and front panel han dles for mounting the instrument in a standard 19 inch equipment rack Option 2A 110 dB Step Attenuator Adds a 10 dB per step attenuator with a 110 dB range for models having a high end fre quency of lt 20 GHz Output power is selected directly in dBm on the front panel or via GPIB Rated RF output power is reduced Option 2B 110 dB Step Attenuator Adds a 10 dB per step attenuator with a 110 dB range for models having a high end fre quency of lt 40 GHz Output power is selected directly in dBm on the front panel or via GPIB Rated RF output power is reduced Option 2C 90 dB Step Attenuator Adds a 10 dB per step attenuator with a 90 dB range for models having a high end fre quency of lt 50 GHz Output power is selected directly in dBm on the front panel or via GPIB Rated RF output power is reduced Option 2D 90 dB Step Attenuator Adds a 10 dB per step attenuator with a 90 dB range for modes having a high end fre quency of lt 60 GHz Output power is selected directly in dBm on the front panel or via GPIB Rated RF output power is reduced Option 2E 120 dB Electronic Step Attenuator Adds a 10 dB per step electronic attenuator with a 120 dB range for models hav ing a high end frequency of lt 8 4 GHz Output power is selected di rectly in dBm on the front panel or via GPIB Rated RF output power is reduced Option 2F 120 dB Electronic Step Attenuator Adds a 10
189. ing the key pad and the STEPS termination key When you have finished setting the open pa rameter close it by pressing Edit Slope or by mak ing another menu selection While monitoring the power level at the device under test DUT adjust the power slope and pivot point to level the power at the DUT 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION LEVELING OPERATIONS User Cal The User Cal user level flatness correction func User Level tion lets you compensate for path variations with Flatness frequency that are caused by external switching Correction amplifiers couplers and cables in the test setup This is done by means of an entered power offset table from a GPIB power meter or calculated data When user level flatness correction is activated the set power level is delivered at the point in the test setup where the calibration was performed This flattening of the test point power level is accom plished by summing a power offset word from the power offset table with the signal generator s nor mal power level DAC word at each frequency point Up to five user level flatness correction power offset tables from 2 to 801 frequency points table can be created and stored in 693XXB memory for recall The GPIB power meters supported are Anritsu Models ML2437A ML2438A and ML4803A and H ewlett Packard Models 437B 438A and 70100A 693XXB SIGNAL GENERATOR
190. is play press AM The main AM Status M enu below Now press the menu soft key More The additional AM Status Menu on the following page is dis played 3 73 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 74 SIGNAL MODULATION This menu lets you perform the following Select the modulating signal source Select the Linear or Log AM operating mode Press Internal External to select the source of the modulating signal Internal selects the modulating signal from the internal AM generator external se lects the modulating signal from an external source The AM status display will reflect your selection Press Log Linear to select the AM operating mode When Internal AM is active the AM Depth display will reflect your selection as XX dB Log or XX 96 Linear When External AM is active the AM Sen sitivity display will reflect your selection as XX dB V Log or XX V Linear Press Previous Menu to return to the main AM Status Menu display Internal AM Source Once you have pressed Internal External to select the internal AM generator as the modulating signal source the Internal AM Status Menu below is dis played 7 Depth Lewes bla ECL E Internal HM Status AM orn 50 ox Rate 16 668 KHz 693 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION This error message is displayed when the AM rate is set gt 100 kHz for a non sinewave modulating waveform square triangl
191. itch point When the sweep width is lt 100 MHz only the center frequency is phase lock corrected Selecting To place the 693XXB in analog sweep frequency Analog Sweep mode press the main menu key Mode CW SWEEP SELECT At the resulting menu display press Analog The Analog Sweep M enu oe is then displayed Analog 5 Fi z H GEE B GHz F2 26 888 maa 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT SWEEP FREQUENCY PANEL OPERATION OPERATION This menu lets you perform the following Select a sweep range edit the sweep start and stop frequency parameters Gotothe sweep ramp menu set the sweep time and select a sweep trigger Select an output power level for the sweep Gotothe alternate sweep menu Setting Sweep To goto the Analog Sweep Ramp menu below from Time the Analog Sweep menu press Sweep Ramp This menu lets you set the sweep time and goto the trigger menu To open the sweep time parameter for editing press Sweep Time Edit the current sweep time using the cursor control key or the rotary data knob or enter a new sweep time using the key pad and appropriate termination key To close the open sweep time pa rameter once you have set the desired time press Sweep Time or make another menu selection To go to the Analog Sweep Trigger menu from this menu press Trigger Menu Sweep trigger is de scribed on the next page Press Previous Menu to return to the Analog Sweep menu 693XXB OM 3 2
192. kHz BW Frequency Range Residual FM Hz RMS 10 MHz to lt 20 0 GHz lt 40 gt 20 0 GHz to lt 40 0 GHz lt 80 gt 40 0 GHz to lt 65 0 GHz lt 160 RESIDUAL FM Analog Sweep and Unlocked FM modes 50 Hz 15 kHz BW Frequency Range Unlocked Narrow FM Mode Unlocked Wide FM Mode quency nang kHz RMS kHz RMS 10 MHz to lt 20 0 GHz lt 5 lt 25 gt 20 0 GHz to lt 40 0 GHz lt 10 lt 50 gt 40 0 GHz to lt 65 0 GHz lt 20 lt 100 AM Noise Floor Typically 145 dBm Hz at 0 dBm output and offsets gt 5 MHz from carrier B 4 693XXB OM PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS RF OUTPUT Power level specifications apply at 25 10 C MAXIMUM LEVELED OUTPUT POWER Model Frequency Output Output Power with Output Power with Number Range Power Step Attenuator Electronic Step GHz dBm dBm Attenuator dBm w Option 22 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz 13 0 11 0 9 0 w Option 21B 0 01 to lt 2 2 13 0 11 0 9 0 69317B 0 01 to lt 8 4 13 0 11 0 9 0 69337B 2 0 to lt 20 0 13 0 11 0 3 0 69347B 0 01 to lt 20 0 13 0 11 0 3 0 0 01 to lt 2 0 13 0 11 0 Not 69367B gt 2 0 to lt 20 0 9 0 7 0 Available gt 20 0 to lt 40 0 6 0 3 0 0 01 to lt 2 0 12 0 10 0 gt 2 0 to lt 20 0 10 0 8 5 Not 693 76 gt 20 0 to lt 40 0 2 5 0 0 Available gt 40 0 to lt 50 0 2 5 1 0 0 01 to 2 0 12 0 10 0 gt 2 0 to lt 20 0 10 0 48 5 Not 69387B 220 0 to 40 0 42 5 0 0 Available gt 40 0 to 50 0 2 0 1 5 gt 50 0 to
193. key The AM raterangeis 0 1 Hz to 1 MHz for sine wave and 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz for square triangle and ramp waveforms To dosethe open AM Rate parameter press Edit Rate or make another menu selection Press Mod Wave to to the Modulation Wave form Selection menu below This menu displays the modulation waveforms on the left that are available from the AM generator Use the cursor control key to highlight the desired modulation waveform then press Select to select it The AM Status display will reflect your selection 3 75 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION ee This error message is displayed when the external AM modulating signal exceeds the input voltage range 21 15V or lt 1 15V The message Reduce AM Input Level also appears at the bottom of the AM status display AM is turned off until the modulating signal is within theinput voltage range SIGNAL MODULATION Press Previous Menu to return to the main AM Status Menu display External AM Source To provide amplitude modulation of the output sig nal using a modulating signal from an external source first set up the external signal generator and connect it to either the 693XXB front or rear panel AM IN connector Next gotothe additional AM Status Menu page 3 74 and press Internal External to select the ex ternal source for the modulating signal The Exter nal AM Status Menu below is then displayed AM
194. l Configure GPIB menu for more selections Press Previous Menu to return to the System Con figuration menu First Additional Configure GPIB Menu When you press More theFirst Additional Config ure GPIB Menu below is displayed Config GPIB Pur Meter Address 13 ____ Meter Hn ML4863 E Language Hat iue This menu lets you perform the following Select the model and set the GPIB address for the power meter that is used to create a user level flatness correction power offset table Refer to page 3 67 for a description of this function Q Select the external interface language for remote operation of 693XXBs with Option 19 installed Refer to page 2 9 for more informa tion Press Pwr Mtr Address to change the address of the power meter on the GPIB the default GPIB address is 13 Enter a new address between 1 and 30 using the cursor control key or the data entry keypad and theterminator key Hz ns ADRS The new GPIB address will appear on the display Press Pwr Mtr Select to select the power meter model being used Supported power meters arethe Anritsu ML2437A ML2438A and ML4803A and 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Hewlett Packard 437B 438A and 70100A Press Native SCPI to select the external interface language to be used for remote operation of the 693X XB Language selection is only available on in struments that have Option 19 in
195. l cursor control key The list index can also be incremented using an ex ternal trigger input Each trigger increments the list index by one 693XXB OM 3 47 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 48 SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION To go to the List Sweep Trigger menu below from the E menu press Trigger select a sweep trigger mode press its menu soft key A message showing the trigger mode selected appears on the right side of the frequency title bar When you are finished press Previous Menu tore turn to the Sweep menu If you select the single trigger mode the Single Soft key is replaced by the Trig soft key Pressing Trig starts a single sweep If a single sweep is in progress pressing Trig causes the sweep to abort and reset Hnalog NOTE With Autotrigger selected and the dwell time per step set to a small value display updating slows down This ensures that sweep speed is not adversely affected Because of this potential display update slow down when leaving List Sweep mode with Auto trigger selected for an other mode Auto trigger is automatically turned off and Manual trigger is selected Thus when List Sweep mode is entered the display updating will be back to nor mal speed 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 9 FIXED POWER LEVEL OPERATION 693XXB OM FIXED POWER LEVEL OPERATION The 693XXB provides leveled output power over a maximum range of up to 33
196. lay changes to in dicate calibration is in progress E When the reference calibration is complete the Cali bration Menu is displayed External Reference Not Connected If calibration is attempted without an external 10 MHz reference signal connected to the rear panel 10 MHz REF IN connector the Calibration Status Menu displays the following Ho External Reference ig connected 693XXB OM 3 109 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 17 INTERNAL POWER MEASUREMENT OPTION 8 3 110 INTERNAL POWER MEASUREMENT The internal power measurement function added by Option 8 lets you measure the power from a test device and display its valuein the lower right corner of the level parameters area of the front panel LCD The power measurement function has a range of 16 dBm to 35 dBm and is compatible with Anritsu 560 7 5400 71 and 6400 71 series de tectors To make a measurement of the power from a test device using the internal power meter function first connect the detector to the test device and to the rear panel POWER METER connector Next press the main menu key At the System Menu display below press Meas Power to enable the power measurement function EE 6 66 dEm 11 58 dEm 05 LE o D Selftest NOTE During operation the word Pwr Under range is displayed to indicate an under range condition the word Pwr Overrange is displayed to indicate an overrange con
197. lects External Trigger Ly 90 00 dim Edit Dwell Time inste Selects Single Trigger NOTE ena J 1 Refer to Chapter 3 paragraph 3 8 for os List Sweep Frequency Mode operating instructions Figure 4 6 List Sweep Frequency Mode Menu Map 4 10 693XXB OM LOCAL OPERATION MENU MAPS 693XXB OM CW SWEEP SELECT FREQUENCY CONTROL EE SELECT LEVEL CONTROL MODULATION SYSTEM ICW SWEEP SELECT CONTROL LEVEL ALC SELECT LEVEL CONTROL MODULATION SYSTEM Edit 5 500 GHz Edit Current Power Level Li 0 00 dBm Edit Power Offset 2 00 ET Level Offset ee PAN EINE NGC Off ERE 062 05559 On Off ALCloorUser Level Offset FIXED POWER LEVEL MODE CM Fa 3 500 666 866 GHz Display Showing Level Offset On Edit Current Edit Power Level Level List i Linear mV Units NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 paragraph 3 9 for Fixed Power Level Mode operating in structions Tag Untag Highlighted Power Level Edit Highlighted Power Level Output Highlighted Power Level Output Next Tagged Power Level Output Previous Tagged Power Level Figure 4 7 Fixed Power Level Mode M enu Map 4 11 LOCAL OPERATION CW POWER MENU MAPS SWEEP MODE Edit Start Power Level v CONTROL
198. level L1 USE WITH A 56100A SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER The 693XXB is directly compatible with the Anritsu Model 56100A Scalar Network Analyzer SNA The following paragraphs provide in structions for connecting the signal generator to the 56100A SNA so that is can be used as a signal source for the analyzer Operating instructions for the network analyzer can be found in the Model 56100A Scalar Network Analyzer Operation Manual P N 10410 00193 56100A SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER DEDICATED GPIB AUX I O IEEE 488GPIB SWR DETECTOR Connecting the 693XXB to the 56100A Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Figure 7 2 693XXB to 56100A SNA Connections Connect the 693XXB signal generator to the 56100A scalar network analyzer as shown in Figure 7 2 Connect end of the Auxiliary 1 0 cable P N 806 7 to the 56100A rear panel AUX I O connector Connect the other end of the cable to the 693XXB rear panel AUX I O connector Connect one end of the dedicated system bus cable P N 2100 1 to the 56100A rear panel DEDICATED GPIB connector Connect the other end of the cable to the 693XXB rear panel IEEE 488 GPIB con nector Turn on the instrument and the 56100A The system is now ready to operate 693XXB OM USE WITH USE WITH A 360B VECTOR OTHER INSTRUMENTS NETWORK ANALYZER 7 4 USE WITH A 360
199. libration Reference Oscillator 3 108 Connectors Front Panel 3 7 Rear Panel A 1 CW Frequency Accuracy Test Test Procedure 5 6 Test Records 5 7 5 12 Test Setup 5 5 CW Frequency Mode 693XXB OM Subject Index Menu Map 4 6 Selecting a CW Frequency 3 22 Selecting a Power Level 3 24 Selecting CW Mode 3 21 CW Power Sweep Mode Menu Map 4 12 Selecting a Sweep Range 3 56 Selecting a Sweep Trigger 3 55 Selecting CW Power Sweep Mode 3 53 Selecting Linear or Logarithmic Sweep 3 57 Setting Dwell Time 3 54 Setting Step Size 3 54 CW Ramp 3 25 D Data Display Description 3 8 Menu Display Format 3 9 Menu Keys 3 10 Data Entry Area Description 3 12 Default Reset Parameters 3 16 3 17 E Entering Data Editing the Current Value 3 19 Entering a New Value 3 20 Opening the Parameter 3 18 Setting Increment Sizes 3 104 Error Messages Operation Related 6 8 Self Test 6 3 6 7 F Fixed Power Level Mode Menu Map 4 11 Selecting a Power Level 3 49 Selecting a Power Level Offset 3 52 Selecting Fixed Power Level Mode 3 49 Selecting Linear or Logarithmic Units 3 50 FM Mode Menu Map 4 16 Operating Modes 3 78 Index 1 SUBJECT INDEX Providing FM 3 78 Frequency Control Frequency List 3 23 Selecting a Preset Frequency 3 22 Selecting a Preset Sweep Range 3 34 Setting a Preset Sweep Range 3 35 Frequency Markers Intensity Markers 3 36 Marker List 3 36 Video Markers 3 36 Frequency Mod
200. lies at 1V input B 8 Units with Option 21B Digital Down Converter At frequecies from 10 MHz to 2 2 GHz the following FM specifications apply Above 2 2 GHz the FM specifications in the left column apply In the following specifications n is the divide ratio from the table below FM Sensitivity Locked Locked Low Noise and Unlocked NarrowFM Modes Continuously variable from 10 kHz V to 20 MHz V n selectable from modulation menu Unlocked Wide FM Mode Continuously variable from 100 kHz V to 100 MHz V n selectable from modulation menu Maximum FM Deviation Locked Mode 1 kHz to lesser of 8 MHz or 0 03 x Fcar rier rates The lesser of 10 MHz or mod rate x 300 n Locked Low Noise Mode 50 kHz to lesser of 8 MHz or 0 03 x Fcarrier rates The lesser of 10 MHz or mod rate x 3 n Unlocked Narrow Mode DC to lesser of 8 MHz or 0 03 x Fcarrier rates 10MHz n Unlocked Wide Mode DC to 100 Hz rates 100 MHz n FM Bandwidth 3 dB Locked Mode 100 kHz rate 1 kHz to lesser of 10 MHz or 0 03 x Fcarrier Locked Low Noise Mode 100 kHz rate 30 kHz to lesser of 10 MHz or 0 03 x Fcarrier Unlocked Narrow Mode 100 kHz rate DC to lesser of 10 MHz or 0 03 x Fcarrier Unlocked Wide Mode DC rate DC to 100 Hz Flatness 10 kHz to lesser of 1 MHz or 0 01 x Fcarrier rates 1 dB relative to 100 kHz rate Accuracy 100 kHz rate 10 5 typical Incidental AM 1 MHz dev n 1 MHz r
201. ment is not phase locked during this FM mode of operation This status message indicates that an external 10 MHz signal is being used as the reference signal for the 693XXB This status message indicates that a constant offset has been applied to the displayed power level This status message indicates that a power slope correction has been applied to the ALC This status message indicates that a user level flatness correction power offset table has been applied to the ALC This status message indicates that the 693XXB has been placed in a source lock mode for operation with a 360B Vector Network Analyzer 6 12 693XXB OM OPERATOR MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING 6 3 TROUBLESHOOTING Table 6 4 provides procedures for troubleshooting common malfunc tions encountered during signal generator operation Included are pro cedures for troubleshooting faults that do not produce error messages such as failure to power up and unexpected shutdown Table 6 4 Troubleshooting 1 of 3 Signal Generator will not turn on OPERATE light is OFF Normal Operation When the 693XXB is connected to the power source the OPERATE light should illuminate and the instrument should power up Step 1 Disconnect the 693XXB from the power source then check the line fuse on the rear panel If the fuse is defective replace page 6 15 If the fuse is good go tothe next step Step2 Check to see if power is available at
202. mputor programs The drawings specifications and information contained herein are the property of Anritsu Company and any unauthorized use or disclosure of these drawings specifica tions and information is prohibited they shall not be reproduced copied or used in wholeor in part as the basis for manufacture or sale of the equipment or software programs without the prior writ ten consent of Anritsu Company DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Manufacturer s Name ANRITSU COMPANY Manufacturer s Address Microwave Measurements Division 490 Jarvis Drive Morgan Hill CA 95037 2809 USA declares that the product specified below Product Name Synthesized CW Sweep Signal Generator Model Number 690XXB 691XXB 693XXB 680X XC 681X XC 683XXC conforms to the requirement o EMC Directive 89 336 EEC as amended by Council Directive 92 3 1 EEC amp 93 68 EEC Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC as amended by Council directive 93 68 EEC Electromagnetic Interference Emissions CISPR 11 1990 EN55011 1991 Group 1 Class A Immunity EN 61000 4 2 1995 EN50082 1 1997 4kV CD 8kV AD EN 61000 4 3 1997 EN50082 1 1997 3V m ENV 50204 EN50082 1 1997 3V m EN 61000 4 4 1995 EN50082 1 1997 0 5kV SL 1kV PL EN 61000 4 5 1995 EN50082 1 1997 IkV L L 2kV L E Electrical Safety Requirement Product Safety IEC 1010 1 1990 A L ENG1010 1 1993 TID Marcel Dubois Corporate Quali Morgan Hill CA Tan 99 Date European
203. n Sensitivity LEVEL ALC quem mpedance LEVEL CONTROL ant AM On Off Edit AM Sensitivity 6000 or 500 Input Impedance Front Panel Input or Rear Panel Input Internal AM Source or External AM Source Log AM 0 25dB V or TTE ta Linear AM 0 100 V Figure 4 11 Amplitude Modulation Mode Menu Map 4 15 LOCAL OPERATION MENU MAPS FREQUENCY MODULATION MODE Select Modulation Waveform FM On Deviationi 000 000 KHz Rate 10 000 s CWISWEEP CH FM On Off Internal FM Status FREQUENCY CENTS M On CONTROL iationi oga goa a Edit FM Deviation e Wave v FM Mode Unlocked Narrow CONTROL MODULATION EE o 51H t PULSE Pulse Internal FM Source or External FM Source FM Deviation 000 000 KHz Rate 16 666 KHz Unlocked Narrow ECW Selects Locked LN FM On Deviationi1 000 000 KHz Rate 10 000 KHz Have FM Mode Unlocked Narrow Low Noise FM Selects Locked FM ures Selects Unlocked Narrow FM Selects Unlocked Wide 1 1 l 1 l 1 1 l 1 1 1 1 l 1 l 1 A Rat 8 9 KHz Edit FM Rate l l l 1 l 1 1 I l 1 NOTE Refer to Chapter 3 paragraph 3 12 for FM Mode operating
204. n power level parameter press Edit L1 or make an other menu selection Entering a New Power Level Press Edit L1 to open the power level parameter then enter the new power level using the keypad and appropriate terminator key To close the open power level parameter press Edit 11 or make an other menu selection NOTE You can also select any of the preset power levels for a frequency sweep or a power level step for analog and step sweeps For instructions refer to para graphs 3 9 Fixed Power Level Operation and 3 10 Power Level Sweep Operation 693XXB OM 3 35 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 36 Frequency Markers SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION The 693XXB provides up to 20 independent pre settable markers FO F 9 and MO M9 that can be used in the analog and step sweep frequency modes for precise frequency identification Marker fre quency accuracy is the same as sweep frequency ac curacy The markers are visible on a CRT display The 693XXB generates two types of markers Q Video Marker produces a pulse on a CRT display at each marker frequency The video marker is either a 45V or 5V pulse avail able at the rear panel AUX I O connector Pulse polarity is selectable from a system configura tion menu Q Intensity Marker produces an intensified dot on a CRT display at each marker fre quency They are obtained by a momentary dwell in the sweep at each marker frequency Intensity markers are only availa
205. n step delay on off and edit the step delay parameters Press On Off to turn the Stepped Delay Mode and off Press Start Delay to open the Delay 1 D1 start time parameter Press End Delay to open the Delay 1 D1 end time parameter Press Step Size to open the step size time parame ter Open the parameter you wish to change then edit the current value using the cursor control key or the rotary data knob or enter a new value using the key pad and appropriate termination key When you have finished setting the open parameter close it by pressing its menu soft key or make another menu selection Press More to gotothe additional Step Delay Mode menu shown on the following page 3 93 LOCAL FRONT SIGNAL PANEL OPERATION MODULATION Trigger pg Polarity This menu lets you set the length of time a Delay 1 D1 time is applied before it is incremented or dec remented by the step size Press Step Time to open the dwell time per step parameter then edit the current value using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the keypad and appropriate termi nation key To dose the open parameter press Step Time or make another menu selection Press Previous Menu to return to the previous Step Delay Menu display Press Top Menu to return to the Internal Pulse Status Menu display Start Delay and End Delay times may be from lower to higher times and vice versa The Step Si
206. nal from the internal pulse generator or external pulse input BNC connector XC 9 FM oM IN Accepts an external modulating signal to produce FM M with Option 06 on the RF output FM M sensitivity FM M mode and input impedance 502 or 6009 are selectable via front panel menu or GPIB BNC connector AM IN Accepts an external modulating signal to produce AM on the RF output AM sensitivity Linear or Log and input impedance 509 or 6009 are selectable via front panel menu or GPIB BNC connector EXT ALC IN Provides for leveling the RF output signal externally with either a remote detector or a power meter Connector accepts a positive or negative 0 5 500 mV signal from a remote detector or a 1V signal from a remote power meter BNC connector Line Fuse Provides over voltage current protection for signal generator circuits during operation and standby Unit requires a 5A type T fuse for 110 Vac line voltage or a 2 5A type T fuse for 220 Vac line voltage LINE SELECT Switch Provides selection of 110 or 220 Vac line voltages When 110 Vac is selected the 693XXB accepts 90 132 Vac 48 440 Hz line voltage when 220 Vac is selected the 693XXB accepts 180 264 Vac 48 440 Hz line voltage Input Line Voltage Receptacle Provides for connecting line voltage to the 693XXB signal generator IEEE 488 GPIB 24 pin connector that provides for remotely controlling the signal generator from an external controller via the IEEE 488 bus
207. nal interface language for re mote operation of units with Option 19 Select scalar mode for operation with a Giga tronics M odel 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer or a Hewlett Packard Model 8757D Scalar Net work Analyzer To go to the Configure GPIB menu from the System Configuration menu press GPIB The Configure GPIB Menu below is displayed Config GFIB GPIB Address a Press GPIB Address to change the address of the 693X XB on the bus the default GPIB address is 5 Enter a new address between 1 and 30 using the cursor control key or the data entry keypad and the terminator key Hz ns ADRS The new GPIB address will appear on the display Press Line Term to select a carriage return CR or a carriage return and line feed CR LF as the GPIB data delimiter Consult the GPIB controller s man ual to determine which data delimiter is required 3 101 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION When SS Mode is selected on this message is displayed in the fre quency mode title bar on all menu displays to remind the operator that the 693XXB is a source lock mode 3 102 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Press SS Mode to turn on the source lock mode for operation with a Anritsu Model 360B Vector N et work Analyzer Refer to paragraph 7 4 for informa tion pertaining to operating the 693XXB with a 360B VNA Press SS Mode again toturn off the source lock mode Press More to gototheFirst Additiona
208. ncy Mode menu map Chapter 4 Figure 4 2 to follow the menu sequences SelectingCW place the 693XXB in the CW frequency mode Mode press the main menu key CW SWEEP SELECT At the resulting menu display press CW The CW Menu below is displayed NOTE When the signal generator is reset it automatically comes up operating in the CW frequency mode This menu lets you perform the following Select a CW frequency for output Copy the current frequency and power infor mation to the current list index Refer to page 3 41 for the list sweep frequency mode operat ing instructions Gotothe master slave menu Refer to Chap ter 7 paragraph 7 2 for Master Slave mode operating instructions Select an output power level for the CW fre quency Gotothe CW ramp menu set the ramp sweep time and turn the CW ramp on off 693XXB OM 3 21 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Selecting a CW Frequency 3 22 CW FREQUENCY OPERATION There are several ways to select a CW frequency for output You can 1 edit the current frequency 2 enter a new frequency or 3 select one of the 20 pre set frequency parameters Editing the Current Frequency Press Edit 1 to open the frequency parameter then edit the current CW frequency using the cursor control key or the rotary data knob To dose the open frequency parameter press Edit 1 or make another menu selection Entering a New
209. nd display the Step Sweep M enu below c With the Step Sweep menu displayed press the main menu key FREQUENCY CONTROL The Sweep F requency Control menu below is displayed d Press Full to select a full range fre quency sweep e Press Edit to open the current power level parameter for editing f Set L1 tothe power level noted on the test record OPERATION VERIFICATION 5 16 Step 2 POWER LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TESTS g Now return to the Step Sweep menu by pressing the main menu key CW SWEEP SELECT h At the Step Sweep menu press Sweep Ramp to goto the Step Sweep Ramp menu below Lewe L 8 88 dBm i Press Dwell Time to open the dwell time per step parameter for editing j Set the dwell time to 1 second NOTE Monitor the 693XXB s Horizontal Output on the Oscilloscope to de termine sweep start and stop As the 693XXB steps through the full fre quency range measure the maximum and minimum Power M eter readings and rec ord the values on the test record Verify that the variation difference between the maximum and minimum readings does not exceed the value noted on the test rec ord 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Step3 Set up the 693XXB as follows for an ana log sweep power level flatness test a Reset the instrument by pressing a then Reset The CW Menu is displayed b Press Analog to placethe 693X
210. nector The internal pulse generator has two selectable dock rates 40 MHz and 10 MHz The 40 MHz clock rate produces higher resolution pulses 25 ns and allows higher 5 the 10 MHz clock rate duces lower resolution pulses 100 ns and lower PRFs External signals or pulses to trigger or gate the in ternal pulse generator can be applied to either the front panel or rear panel PULSE TRIGGER IN con nector 693XXB OM 3 87 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION This error message is displayed when a pulse parameter setting is invalid for the current pulse modu lation state A listing of invalid parameter settings is provided Table 6 2 beginning on page 6 8 Ft ee eee At a 40 MHz pulse clock rate the pulse period must be 125 ns longer than the pulsewidths delays at a 10 MHz pulse dock rate the pulse period must be 500 ns longer than the pulse widths delays 3 88 Providing Pulse Modulation SIGNAL MODULATION The following are the menu selections to provide pulse modulation of the output signal using a modu lating signal from both the internal pulse generator and an external source Internal Pulse Source Press t the resulting menu dis play press Pulse The Internal Pulse Status Menu below is displayed On off Edit Period dui 100 000 us Di 200 000 us P He M H4 Trigger Polarity Delayed High RF On
211. nfiguration menus 3 96 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Configuring the Front Panel 693XXB OM SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Configuring the front panel of the signal generator involves adjusting the intensity level of the data dis play for ease of viewing To goto the Configure F ront Panel menu from the System Configuration menu press Front Panel The Configure F ront Panel Menu below is dis played Press Brite repeatedly to increase the intensity of the data display tothe desired level Press Dim repeatedly to decrease the intensity of the data display Press Previous Menu to return to the System Con figuration Menu display 3 97 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Configuring the Rear Panel 3 98 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Configuring the rear panel of the signal generator consists of selecting the polarity of the retrace blanking bandswitch blanking retrace penlift and video marker outputs To goto the Configure Rear Panel menu from the System Configuration menu press Rear Panel The Rear Panel Menu below is displayed Contis Rear Panel p eus Fenlift Marker Pol Press Blanking to select a 5V or 5V level for the retrace and bandswitch blanking outputs The retrace blanking and bandswitch blanking signal outputs are both available at the rear panel AUX I O connector The display will reflect your selection Press
212. ng the RF output signal externally using either a detec tor or a power meter RF Output Connector The RF output connector provides RF output from a 50Q source NOTE To prevent power losses due to an imped ance mismatch the mating connector and cable should also be rated at 509 3 7 LOCAL FRONT DATA DISPLAY PANEL OPERATION AREA 3 3 DATA DISPLAY AREA The data display area consists of the data display and the surrounding menu keys The data display is a dot matrix liquid crystal display LCD that provides 16 lines of 40 characters each Information is presented on the LCD in the form of menu displays The menu keys either select the main menu to be displayed select a sub menu of the current menu display or control a function on the current menu dis play Figure 3 2 shows the format of the menu display and identifies the display elements It also shows the placement of the menu keys in relation to the display The paragraphs that follow provide descrip tions of the menu display elements and the menu keys Frequency Frequency Level Menu Main Menu Main Menu Mode Parameters Level Mode Parameters Labels Menu Keys Key Cursor Title Bar Area Title Bar Area Side Keys Soft Keys CW SWEEP SELECT FREQUENCY CONTROL LEVEL ALC ELECT Modulation Title Bars LEVEL CONTROL MODULATION SYSTEM Modulation Menu Menu Labels Status Areas Soft Key
213. ng Menu 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM LEVELING OPERATIONS At the Leveling menu pressing either Internal or Fixed Gain will turn off external leveling Press Previous Menu to return to the ALC M ode menu Fixed Gain In the fixed gain mode the ALC is disabled The RF Level DAC and step attenuator if installed are used to control the relative power level Power is not detected at any point and the absolute power level is uncalibrated Fixed gain mode is selected from the leveling menu Press Leveling Menu to goto the Leveling Menu Analog Sw El 2 888 GEE Bee B GHz F2 HEE aad To select fixed gain mode press Fixed Gain Toreturn to normal ALC operation press Internal Press Previous Menu to return to the ALC M ode menu 3 63 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION NOTE The set power level may not be maintained when switching be tween attenuator coupling modes 3 64 Attenuator Decoupling LEVELING OPERATIONS In 693XXBs equipped with option 2 step attenua tors the ALC and attenuator work in conjunction to provide leveled output power down to 140 dBm In the normal coupled leveling mode when the de sired power level is set the correct combination of ALC level and attenuator setting is determined by the instrument firmware some applications such as receiver sensitivity testing it is desireable to con trol the ALC level and attenuator settin
214. ng a high end frequency of 8 4 GHz lt 5 ms to be within 1 kHz of final frequency MARKERS Up to 20 independent settable markers FO F9 and MO M9 Video Markers 5V or 5V marker output selectable from system menus AUX I O connector rear panel Intensity Markers Available in Analog Sweeps of 1 Second Sweep Time Produces an intensified dot on trace obtained by momentary dwell in RF sweep Marker Accuracy Same as sweep frequency accuracy Marker Resolution Analog Sweep 1 MHz or Sweep Width 4096 which ever is greater Step Sweep 1 kHz 0 1 Hz with Option 11 SWEEP TRIGGERING Sweep triggering is provided for Analog Frequency Sweep Step Frequency Sweep List Frequency Sweep and CW Power Sweep Auto Triggers sweep automatically External Triggers a sweep on the low to high transition of an external TTL signal AUX I O connector rear panel Single Triggers aborts and resets a single sweep Reset sweep may be selected to be at the top or bottom of the sweep The pen lift will activate at sweep times 21 second B 2 SPECTRAL PURITY All specifications apply to the phase locked CW and Step Sweep modes at the lesser of 10 dBm output or maxi mum specified leveled output power unless otherwise noted SPURIOUS SIGNALS Harmonic and Harmonic Related 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz Option 22 30 dBc 10 MHz to 100 MHz Option 21B 40 dBc 2100 MHz to 2 2 GHz Option 21B 50 dBc 10 MHz to 50 MHz
215. not a specification 693XXB OM 5 29 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Level Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 12 of 27 Model 69337B w Option 15B Serial No Date Model 69337B with Option 15B High Power with Option 2F Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power 7 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 5 dBm 4dBm dBm dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 7 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 7 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification 5 30 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Leve Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 13 of 27 Model 69347B Serial No Date Model 69347B without Option 2 Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 13 dBm dBm 13 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm
216. nu first press the main menu key LEVEL ALC SELECT At the Level ALC Select Menu display press ALC Mode The ALC Mode Menu below is dis played fAnalog Sweep BEE Bee GHz Fz mas Ba m 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM LEVELING OPERATIONS The ALC Mode menu lets you perform the following Q Gotothe leveling menu select the ALC mode of operation Gotothe attenuation menu decouple the attenuator if equipped from the ALC system and set the power level and attenuation Select either the front panel or rear panel external ALC input Internal Leveling This is the normal default leveling mode Output power is sensed by the internal detector in the 693XXB The detector output signal is fed back to the ALC circuitry to adjust the output power level Internal ALC is selected from the leveling menu To go to the Leveling Menu from the ALC Mode menu press Leveling Menu The Leveling Menu below is displayed Hnalos Sweep F1 2 888 BEE Bee B GHz F2 26 606 mas HHH m To select internal ALC press Internal Pressing one of the other leveling menu soft keys External Detector Power Meter or Fixed Gain will turn off internal leveling Press Previous Menu to return to the ALC M ode menu External Leveling In external leveling the output power from the 693XXB is detected by an external detector or power meter The signal from the detec
217. ode When enabled the 693XXB will shift to the analog sweep frequency mode sweeping at the full range of the instrument 693XXB OM USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS 693XXB OM Initiating HP8757D SNA Operation USE WITH A HP8757D SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER Turn ON the HP8757D to initiate scalar network analyzer operation Refer to the Hewlett Packard Model 8757D Scalar Network Analyzer Operation Manual for operating instructions 7 23 7 24 1 mrnaopucrioN 2 REAR PANEL CONNECTORS A 3 CONNECTOR PINOUT DIAGRAMS 693XXB OM Appendix A Rear Panel Connectors This appendix provides descriptions for the rear panel connectors on a typical Series 693XXB Synthesized High Performance Signal Gener ator Figure A 1 provides a illustration of the rear panel and describes the rear panel connectors Figures A 2 and A 3 provide pinout diagrams and descri ptions for the AUX 1 0 and IEEE 488 GPIB multipin connectors on the rear panel A 1 REAR PANEL CONNECTORS A WARNING FOR CONTINUED FIRE PROTECTION REPLACE ONLY WITH SPECIFIED TYPE AND RATED FUSE O AUX I O A WARNING DO NOT OPERATE WITH POWER CORD UNGROUNDED INPUT 90 132VAC 180 264VAC 48 440Hz 400VA max IEEE 488 GPIB 000000000000 0000000000000 A WARNING NO OPERATOR SERVICE ABLE PARTS INSIDE REFER SERVICING TO QUALI
218. of the Anritsu Models 6600 6700 6XX00 series signal sources When emulating another signal source the instrument will be lim ited to the capabilities mnemonics and parameter resolu tions of the emulated instrument GENERAL Stored Setups Stores front panel settings and nine addi tional front panel setups in a non volatile RAM A system menu allows saving and recalling of instrument setups Whenever the instrument is turned on control settings come on at the same functions and values existing when the instrument was turned off Memory Sequencing Input Accepts a TTL low level sig nal to sequence through nine stored setups AUX I O con nector rear panel Self Test Instrument self test is performed when Selftest soft key is selected If an error is detected an error mes sage is displayed in a window on the LCD identifying the probable cause and remedy Secure Mode Disables all frequency power level and modulation state displays Stored setups saved in secure mode remain secured when recalled Mode selectable from a system menu 693XXB OM Parameter Entry Instrument controlled parameters can be entered in three ways keypad rotary data knob or the and v touch pads of the cursor control key The keypad is used to enter new parameter values the rotary data knob and the cursor control key are used to edit existing parameter values The and touch pads of the cursor control key move the cursor left and right one
219. of the Down Converter leveling circuitry The 693XXB operates 01 2 GHz Unleveled normally but will have unleveled RF output in the 0 01 2 GHz frequency range Error 129 Switched Filter or Level Detector Failed Indicates a failure of either the switched filter or level detector circuitry The 693XXB may or may not produce an RF output Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the instrument in this condition Error 130 2 3 3 GH Switched Filter Indicates a failure in the 2 3 3 GHz switched filter path within the switched filter assembly The 693XXB may or may not produce an RF output in this frequency range Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the instrument in this condition Error 131 3 3 5 5 GH Switched Filter Indicates a failure in the 3 3 5 5 GHz switched filter path within the switched filter assembly The 693XXB may or may not produce an RF output in this frequency range Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the instrument in this condition Error 132 5 5 8 4 GH Switched Filter Indicates a failure in the 5 5 8 4 GHz switched filter path within the switched filter assembly The 693XXB may or may not produce an RF output in this frequency range Use caution and always determine the output power level when operating the instrument in this condition Error 133 8 4 13 25 GH Swit
220. ols inputs and outputs Q An annotated diagram of the menu display format showing where the current frequency power and modulation information is displayed Q Instructions for performing signal generator operations namely frequency and frequency sweep power level and power sweep signal modulation system configuration and saving and recall ing instrument setups 3 5 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 2 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT FRONT PANEL LAYOUT The 693XXB front panel is divided into two main areas the data dis play area and the data entry area The following paragraphs providea brief description of the front panel controls inputs outputs data dis play and data entry areas as shown in Figure 3 1 Detailed descrip tions of the data display and data entry areas are contained in para graphs 3 3 and 3 4 RE Output Control Data Display Data Entry Key i Clear Back GHz Entry Space Sec Generator IN FREQUENCY 7 8 9 MHz ds pes Ls y FE Ae 1 2 3 Step VA on E Modulation External S Q 5 ma mn AGI CAU ION ps ws Line Menu Modulation External RF Output Key Keys Connectors ALC Connector Connector Figure3 1 Front Pand 693X
221. on is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 11 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 11 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification 5 20 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Leve Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 3 of 27 Model 69317B Serial No Date Model 69317B with Option 2E Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 9 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 9 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 9 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification 693XXB OM 5 21 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNES
222. one 0211 968550 FAX 0211 9685555 INDIA MEERA AGENCIES P LTD 23 Community Center Kailash Colony Extension New Delhi India Telephone 91 11 6442700 FAX 91 11 6442500 ISRAEL TECH CENT LTD 4 Raul Valenberg St Tel Aviv 69719 Telephone 03 64 78 563 FAX 03 64 78 334 ITALY ANRITSU Sp A Roma Office Via E Vittorini 129 00144 Roma EUR Telephone 06 50 99 711 FAX 06 50 22 4252 KOREA ANRITSU CORPORATION LTD 8F Seocho Dong Secho Ku Seoul 137 070 South Korea Telephone 2 581 6603 FAX 2 582 6603 JAPAN ANRITSU CUSTOMER SERVICE LTD 1800 Onna Atsugi shi Kanagawa Prf 243 Japan Telephone 0462 96 6688 FAX 0462 25 8379 SINGAPORE ANRITSU SINGAPORE PTE LTD 6 New Industrial Road 06 01 02 Hoe Huat Industrial Bldg Singapore 536199 Telephone 282 2400 FAX 282 2533 SOUTH AFRICA ETECSA 12 Surrey Square Office Park 330 Surrey Avenue Ferndale Randburt 2194 South Africa Telephone 011 27 11 787 7200 FAX 011 27 11 787 0446 SWEDEN ANRITSU AB Botivid Center Fittja Backe 13A 145 84 Stockholmn Telephone 08 534 707 00 FAX 08 534 707 30 TAIWAN ANRITSU CO LTD 6F No 96 Section 3 Chien Kuo N Road Taipei Taiwan R O C Telephone 02 515 6050 FAX 02 509 5519 UNITED KINGDOM ANRITSU LTD 200 Capability Green Luton Bedfordshire LU1 3LU England Telephone 015 82 433200 FAX 015 82 731303 2 14 693XXB OM Chapter 3 Local F
223. ont Panel 3 97 Configuring the Rear Panel 3 98 Configuring the RF amp 3 99 Configuring the GPIB amp lt lt 4s 3 101 Setting Increment Sizes 3 104 3 14 SAVING RECALLING INSTRUMENT SETUPS 3 105 Saving SEEDS su soU egeo RU 3 105 Recalling Setups 3 105 Erasing Stored Setups 3 106 3 15 SECURE 3 107 3 16 REFERENCE OSCILLATOR CALIBRATION 3 108 3 17 INTERNAL POWER MEASUREMENT 8 3 110 Chapter 4 Local Operation Menu Maps 4 1 INTRODUCTION 008 4 3 4 2 MENU MAP DESCRIPTION 4 3 Chapter 5 Operation Verification 5 1 INTRODUCTION d coc sos so sa OX 5 3 5 2 TEST EQUIPMENT osa ee se Sew fos 5 3 5 3 TEST RECORDS iu asse un mom Rae Re 5 3 5 4 INITIAL 693XXB CHECKOUT 5 4 Power UPD oaao 5 4 Self Test 3 59 2 3 49 a dM um ue he vh 5 4 Resetting the 693 5 4 Warmup Time aoaaa aa 5 4 5 5 CW FREQUENCY ACCURACY TEST 5 5 Test 5 5 Test Procedure 5 6 5 6 POWER LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TESIS cat gue ae E Ge EO 5 13 Test 5 13 Power Level Accuracy Test Procedure 5 14 Power Level Flatness Test Procedure 5 15 iv 693XXB OM
224. ontaining a set of track slides 90 tilt capability mounting ears and front panel handles to let the instrument be mounted in a standard 19 inch equipment rack Option 2A 110 dB Step Attenuator Adds a 10 dB step attenuator with 110 dB range for models having a high end frequency of lt 20 GHz Rated RF output power is reduced Option 2B 110 dB Step Attenuator Adds a 10 dB step attenuator with 110 dB range for models having a high end frequency of lt 40 GHz Rated RF output power is reduced Option 2C 90 dB Step Attenuator Adds a 10 dB step attenuator with 90 dB range for models having a high end frequency of lt 50 GHz Rated RF output power is reduced Option 2D 90 dB Step Attenuator Adds a 10 dB step attenuator with 90 dB range for models having a high end frequency of 60 GHz Rated RF output power is reduced Option 2E 120 dB Electronic Step Attenuator Addsa 10 dB step electronic attenuator with a 120 dB range for models having a high end frequency of 8 4 GHz Rated RF output power is reduced Option 2F 120 dB Electronic Step Attenuator Adds a 10 db step electronic attenuator with a 120 dB range for models having a high end frequency of lt 20 GHz Rated RF output power is reduced Option 6 Phase Modulation M Adds phase modula tion capability The internal FM generator becomes the FM generator Not available in combination with Option 7 Option 7 Delete AM FM Generator Deletes the internal AM and FM gener
225. or 54000 xWRxx Millimeter Wave Source Modules BNC Twinax connector rear panel Option 19 SCPI Programmability Adds GPIB command mnemonics complying with Standard Commands for Pro grammable Instruments SCPI Version 1993 0 SCPI pro gramming complies with IEEE 488 2 1987 Option 21B Digital Down Converter Replaces the stan dard Analog Down Converter 0 01 to 2 0 GHz with a Digi tal Down Converter 0 01 to 2 2 GHz Option 22 0 1 Hz to 10 MHz Audio Frequency Adds frequency coverage below 10 MHz In models having a high end frequency of lt 20 GHz rated output power is re duced by 1 dB in models having a high end frequency of gt 20 GHz rated output power is reduced by 2 dB B 13 Number 693X XB Front Panel Layout 3 6 General Description 1 3 Manual Electronic 1 5 Manuals Related 1 5 Models List of 1 4 Options List of 1 6 Performance Specifications B 1 Rear Panel Layout A 2 A ALC 3 60 Alternate Sweep F requency Mode Activating the Alternate Sweep 3 38 Selecting a Power L evel 3 40 Selecting a Sweep Range 3 39 Selecting Alternate Sweep 3 38 AM Mode Menu Map 4 15 Operating Modes 3 73 Providing AM 3 73 Analog Sweep F requency Mode Description 3 26 Menu Map 4 7 Selecting a Power L evel 3 35 Selecting a Sweep Range 3 33 Selecting a Sweep Trigger 3 28 Selecting Alternate Sweep 3 38 Selecting Analog Sweep Mode 3 26 Setting the Sweep Time 3 27 Using Frequency Markers 3 36 C Ca
226. or editing press Sweep Time Edit the current sweep time using the cursor control key or the rotary data knob or enter a new sweep time using the keypad and appropriate termination key To close the open sweep time parameter once you have set the desired time press Sweep Time or make another menu selection Press Log Linear to select logarithmic or linear step sweep operation The soft key label is highlighted in reverse video to reflect your selection Press Trigger Menu to go to the Step Sweep Trigger menu The trigger menu lets you select a sweep trig ger previously described on page 3 28 Press Previous Menu to return to the Step Sweep Ramp menu 3 31 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Manual Sweep Mode Selecting Manual Sweep Mode 3 32 SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION In manual sweep frequency mode the output fre quency can be manually tuned in phase locked steps between the selected start and stop frequencies us ing the rotary data knob As the knob is turned the current output frequency is displayed on the data display as Fm The step size or number of steps be tween the start and stop frequencies are controlla ble from the manual sweep menu The step size range is 1 kHz 0 1 Hz with Option 11 tothe full frequency range of the instrument the number of steps range is 1 to 10 000 To place the 693XXB in manual sweep frequency mode press the main menu key CW SWEEP SELECT At the resulting menu display pr
227. or the list sweep are displayed in this area Q Power Level Parameters Area The cur rent power level in dBm or or the start and stop levels of the current power level sweep range in dBm or mV are displayed in this area Q Modulation Status Areas T hese areas dis play Int Ext or Off toindicatethe status of signal modulation for the current setup Menu Labels Each of the menu soft keys located below and to the right of the display has a corresponding menu label area on the display These labels identify the func tion of the soft keys for the current menu display In 3 9 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION FM Menu Keys CW SWEEP SELECT FREQUENCY CONTROL LEVEL ALC SELECT LEVEL CONTROL MODULATION SYSTEM 3 10 DATA DISPLAY AREA most cases when a soft key is pressed its menu la bel changes appearance to visually show the On Off condition Window Display A window display that overlays a portion of the cur rent menu display is used to 1 show the parameter being edited 2 display selection lists of preset fre quencies power levels markers etc 3 show the modulation and system configuration choices and current selections or 4 show self test error mes sages A typical window display is shown on the left As shown in Figure 3 2 there are two types of menu keys that surround the data display main menu keys and menu soft keys The main menu keys are positioned to the
228. ower Edit menu below from the Edit List menu press Edit Power This menu lets you scroll through the list power lev els and edit selected power levels List Powers eee eit GREET eser eee 6 HA WESEL ii The menu displays total of 10 power levels Use the cursor control key to select a power level from the list The selected power level is highlighted in reverse video and displayed in full below the power level list 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION Press Edit to edit the highlighted power level or en ter a new power level Press Page Up to scroll the displayed power levels to the next 10 in thelist Press Page Down to scroll the displayed power levels to the previous 10 in the list Press Previous Menu to return to the Edit List menu Additional Edit List Menu At the Edit List menu press More to gotothe ad ditional Edit List menu below Fr GEE Bee B GHz List 99 PULSE analog This menu lets you insert and delete entries from the list Press Insert Entry to insert the default frequency 5 GHz and power level 0 dBm at the current list index NOTE Because the list size is fixed inserting a new index will cause the last index to be lost Whatever frequency and power level are at list index 1999 will be deleted and cannot be recovered Press Delete Entry to delete the current list index
229. ower slope function 5 Power 5 Slope 5 Power Slope NT LM s Pivot Point Que B on SK st Power at DUT b AL With Compensation E B N P Power at DUT __ Without Compensation go to the ALC Loop Menu from the Level ALC Control Menu display press ALC Loop The ALC Loop Menu below is displayed CH 3 Fi 2 888 GHz ALC LoodUser Cal This menu lets you turn the power slope on or off and edit the slope value and pivot point frequency 693XXB OM 3 65 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Powe eae eee See ee eee eee eae mene ae eee eee When Power Slope is selected ON this status message is displayed on all menu displays to remind the op erator that a power slope correction has been applied to the ALC 3 66 LEVELING OPERATIONS 93 Press Slope On Off to activate the ALC power slope function Press Edit Pivot to open the pivot point frequency parameter for editing Edit the current frequency using the cursor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value using the keypad and appropriate termination key When you have finished setting the open parameter close it by pressing Edit Pivot or by making another menu selection Press Edit Slope to open the slope parameter for editing Edit the current slope value using the cur sor control key or rotary data knob or enter a new value us
230. p The CW Level Sweep Menu below is displayed Fa 3 500 800 GHz Li Edit 2 a5 This menu lets you perform the following Select a power level sweep range edit the sweep start and stop power level parameters Gotothe sweep ramp menu set the dwell time per step the step size or number of steps and select a sweep trigger 3 53 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION This error message is displayed when 1 the step size value entered is greater than the level sweep range 2 the number of steps en tered results in a step size of less than 0 01 dB Log 0 001 mV Linear Entering a valid step size will clear the error 3 54 Setting CW Power Sweep Step Size and Dwell Time POWER LEVEL SWEEP OPERATION There are two ways to set the size of each step of the CW power sweep set the step size or set the number of steps The step size range is 0 01 dB Log or 0 001 mV Linear to the full power range of the instrument the number of steps 15 1 to 10 000 The dwell time per step of the CW power sweep can be set for any time in the range of 1 ms to 99 sec f the sweep crosses a step attenuator set ting there will be a sweep dwell of approximately 20 ms to allow setting of the step attenuator The step size and dwell time per step are set from the CW Level Sweep Ramp menu below To goto the CW Level Sweep Ramp menu from the CW Level Sweep menu press
231. put power over a maximum range of up to 27 dB up to 141 dB with Option 2 An automatic level control ALC system controls the amplitude and power level of the RF output The operator can select the ALC mode of operation internal external de tector or power meter or fixed gain ALC off In addition the signal generator provides 1 an ALC power slope function that provides com pensation for high frequency system or cable losses 2 a decouple function that allows decoupling of the step attenuator if equipped from the ALC system and 3 a user level flatness correction calibra tion function that provides compensation for path variations with frequency in atest setup The following paragraphs provide descriptions and operating instruc tions for the leveling modes and functions Use the Leveling M odes menu map Chapter 4 Figure 4 10 to follow the menu sequences Selectinga The ALC system is a feedback control system in Leveling which the output power is measured at a detector Mode and compared with the expected power level If the output and desired power levels do not equal the ALC adjusts the power output until they do The ALC feedback signal can come from either the inter nal detector or an external detector or power meter Alternatively the output power can be set to a fixed level without using the normal feedback ALC off The ALC mode menu lets you make the selection of a leveling mode To goto the ALC Mode me
232. quency 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 13 dBm dBm 13 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 13 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 13 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB typical not a specification 693XXB OM 5 19 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Levd Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 2 of 27 Model 69317B Serial No Date Model 69317B with Option 2A Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 11 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 7dBm dBm 7dBm dBm 6dBm dBm 6dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 4dBm dBm 4dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm Specificati
233. r Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 5 0 GHz CW Frequency 25 0 GHz CW Frequency 45 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 10 dBm dBm 2 5 dBm dBm 2 5 dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 1 5 dBm dBm 1 5 dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 0 5 dBm dBm 0 5 dBm dBm 7dBm dBm 0 5 dBm dBm 0 5 dBm dBm 6dBm dBm 1 5 dBm dBm 1 5 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 2 5 dBm dBm 2 5 dBm dBm 4dBm dBm 3 5 dBm dBm 3 5 dBm dBm 3dBm dBm 4 5 dBm dBm 4 5 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 5 5 dBm dBm 5 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 6 5 dBm dBm 6 5 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 7 5 dBm dBm 7 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 8 5 dBm dBm 8 5 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 9 5 dBm dBm 9 5 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 5 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 2 5 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB 0 01 to 40 GHz 2 2 dB 40 to 50 GHz Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 2 5 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB 0 01 to 20 GHz 8 2 dB 20 to 40 GHz 10 2 dB 40 to 50 GHz typical not a specification 693XXB OM 5 41 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Leve Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 24 of 27 Model 69377B Serial No Date Model 69377B
234. r d ockwise The menu also lets you turn the increment mode on and off go to the ncrement menu from the System Con figuration menu press Incr Menu The Increment Menu below is displayed Level Li 5 00 dEm Press Freq Incr to open the frequency increment parameter Press Level Incr to open the power level increment parameter Press Time Incr to open the time increment parameter Open the parameter you wish to change then edit the current value using the cursor control key or ro tary data knob or enter a new value using the key pad and appropriate termination key When you have finished setting the open parameter close it by pressing its menu soft key or by making another menu selection Press Incr Mode to turn the increment mode on Press again to turn it off When done press Previous Menu to return tothe System Configuration Menu display 693XXB OM SAVING RECALLING LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION INSTRUMENT SETUPS 3 14 SAVING RECALLING INSTRUMENT SETUPS The 693XXB offers the capability to store up to ten complete front panel setups The setups are numbered 0 through 9 The following paragraphs describe how to save and recall front panel setups Saving Setups Recalling Setups Once you have decided that an instrument setup should be retained for future use follow the proce dure below to save it First press 191 to display the System M enu Now press Setups The Setups M
235. ragraphs describe how to set up the 693XXB to enablethe 8003 Scalar GPIB mode On the 693XXB front panel press LINE to place the signal generator in operation Allow the signal generator to warm up then press the EYE main menu key At the System Menu display press Config The System Configuration Menu shown below is displayed At the System Configuration menu press GPIB The Configure GPIB Menu shown below is dis 7 17 USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS 7 18 Initiating 8003 SNA Operation USE WITH A 8003 SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER At the Configure GPIB menu press More to goto the First Additional Configure GPIB Menu below Confia GPIE Pur Meter Address 15 Pwr Meter An ML4se2 0 quem Language Native H At this menu press More to goto the Second Addi tional Configure GPIB Menu below cl Confia GPIB E 5003 Scalar Disabled ___ Scalar Disabled Press 8003 Scalar to enable the 8003 Scalar GPIB mode The display will reflect your selection The 693XXB signal generator is now ready to oper ate as a signal source for the 8003 SNA To initiate SNA operation turn ON the M odel 8003 and calibrate a 8003 sensor s Refer to the M 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer Operation Manual for the calibration procedure Usethe following procedure to set the 8003 Source Address to 5 The default address is 6 Step 1 On the 8003 front panel press the CON FIG key
236. rent parameter display clears for entry of a new value Enter the new value for the parameter then press the appropriate terminator key to store it in memory If the entered value is out side the allowable range of the open parameter the entry is not accepted and the previous value for the parameter is displayed NOTE A frequency entry may be terminated in GHz MHz kHz or Hz however it is al ways displayed on the data display in GHz A time entry may be terminated in Sec Ms us or ns however it is always displayed on the data display in Sec If you make an error during data entry either 1 press BACK SPACE to delete the entry one charac ter at a time starting from the last character en tered or 2 delete the entire entry by pressing CLEAR ENTRY Then re enter the correct value Now try entering a new value for the CW frequency displayed on your instrument using the data entry keypad and termination keys To close the open parameter when you are finished entering data press Edit 1 or make another menu selection 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT CW FREQUENCY PANEL OPERATION OPERATION 3 7 CW FREQUENCY One of the signal generator s major functions is to produce discrete OPERATION CW frequencies across the frequency range of the instrument The fol lowing paragraphs describe how to place the 693XXB in the CW fre quency mode select a CW frequency and power level for output and activate the CW ramp Use the CW Freque
237. reset parameters for the main F requency Control and Level Control menus the menu soft keys lo cated to the right of the data display either control a function on the current menu display or select an additional sub menu Menu labels that identify the current function of each soft key are shown on the menu display adjacent to the soft keys 3 11 DATA ENTRY LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 4 DATA ENTRY AREA AREA The value of a selected 693XXB parameter can be changed using the rotary data knob and or keys of the data entry area Each element of the data entry area is identified in Figure 3 3 and described in the fol lowing paragraphs Cursor Control Key Back Space ey Clear Entry Key Terminator Keys GHz dBm Y E bie MHz ms dB kHz 5 STEPS Hz ns ADRS Rotary Keypad Data Knob Figure 3 3 3 12 Front Pand Data Entry Area Cursor Control Key general this diamond shaped key controls the movement of the cursor on the display When a pa rameter is opened for editing a cursor appears un der the open parameter Each time the lt or gt pad is pressed the cursor moves left or right by one digit The 4 or v pad can then be used to increase or de crease the value of the parameter The unit size of the increase or decrease that occurs each time the a or v pad is pressed is determined
238. rnal pulses to pulse modulate the output signal Doublet Triplet and Quadruplet pulse modes are not availablein this trigger mode FREE RUN PULSE SYNC OUT OUTPUT DELAYED PULSE SYNC OUT OUTPUT D1 TRIGGERED EXTERNAL TRIGGER OUTPUT TRIGGERED W DELAY EXTERNAL TRIGGER OUTPUT GATED EXTERNAL PULSE OUTPUT COMPOSITE EXTERNAL PULSE PULSE SYNC OUT INTERNAL PULSE OUTPUT D1 9 wi gt LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 92 SIGNAL MODULATION At the additional Internal Pulse Status menu press Config to go to the Internal Pulse Configuration Menu below 1 68 BB uz ead x Ed Mz Wa i Rese Trigger Free fg Polarity ah Bn This menu lets you perform the following Select the display of PRF or Period on the In ternal Pulse status display Select the polarity of the signal Low or High that turns the RF on Select the pulse generator s clock rate 40 MHz or 10 MHz Select the input connector front panel or rear panel PULSE TRIGGER IN that is connected to the external trigger pulse source Press Period to select the display of Pulse PRF or Pulse Period on the Internal
239. ront Panel Operation Table of Contents 3 1 INTRODUCTION 3 2 4 4 oo a 8 dere ae 3 5 3 2 FRONT PANEL LAYOUT 2 224 4044 3 6 LineKey 3 6 Data Display Area s ooo o on on n 3 6 Data Entry Area ee 3 7 RF Output Control Key 3 7 CODIGOS 3 7 3 3 DATA DISPLAY AREA 3 8 Menu Display Format 3 9 3 10 3 4 DATA ENTRY 3 12 3 5 INSTRUMENT START UP 3 14 Powering Up the 693XXB 3 14 Start Up Display 3 14 Standby Operation 3 14 Self Testing the 693 3 15 Resetting to Default Parameters 3 15 3 6 ENTERING DATA eo OS 3 18 Opening the Parameter 3 18 Editing the Current Value 3 19 Entering a New Value 3 20 3 7 CW FREQUENCY OPERATION 3 21 Selecting CW 3 21 Selecting a CW Frequency 3 22 Selecting a Power Level 3 24 3 25 Table of Contents Continued 3 2 SWEEP FREQUENCY 3 26 Analog Sweep Mode 3 26 Selecting Analog Sweep Mode 3 26 Setting Sweep Time 3 27 Selecting a Sweep Trigger 3 28 Step Sweep
240. s Bottom Keys Figure 3 2 Front Pand Data Display Area 3 8 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM DATA DISPLAY AREA Menu Display The menu display is divided into specific areas that Format show the frequency power level and modulation in formation for the current instrument setup Menu labels for the current menu s soft keys appear along the bottom and right side of the display Title Bars A shaded title bar identifies each parameter area Mode information is displayed in reverse video on the title bars Q Frequency Mode Title Bar The current frequency mode CW Analog Sweep Step Sweep Manual Sweep or List Sweep appears on the left side of the bar In analog step and list sweep mode the type of sweep trigger ap pears on theright side Q Level Mode Title Bar The current power level mode L evel or Level Sweep appears on the left side of the bar In a level sweep mode thetype of sweep trigger appears on the right side of the bar Q Modulation Title Bars E ach type of signal modulation AM FM M and Pulse has a separate title bar on the display Parameter Areas The parameter areas show the frequency power level and modulation information for the current 693XXB setup Q Frequency Parameters Area The current CW frequency in GHz the start and stop fre quencies of the current frequency sweep range in GHz the current list index and frequency or the start and stop indexes f
241. s display will reflect your selection as On or Off the Pulse modulation status area will reflect your selection as Ext On or Off Press Internal External to select the source of the modulating signal The Pulse status display will re flect your selection Press LRF On H RF On to select the polarity of the signal Low or High that turns the RF on The External Pulse Status display will reflect your selec tion Press Front Rear to select the front or rear panel PULSE TRIGGER IN connector The External Pulse Status display will reflect your selection 3 95 LOCAL FRONT SYSTEM PANEL OPERATION CONFIGURATION 3 13 SYSTEM The system configuration function provides menus that let you set or CONFIGURATION select instrument configuration items for example display intensity polarity of blanking and video marker outputs RF on or off during re trace or between steps frequency scaling GPIB operating parameters external interface language and increment sizes for frequency power level and time parameters Use the System Configuration menu map Chapter 4 Figure 4 15 to follow the menu sequences To to the System Configuration menu first press 1518 At the System Menu display press Config The System Configuration Menu below is displayed F1 2 868 mam mam mB GHz Fear Panel Li 0 00 SN B 5 e ees This menu lets you go to the Front Panel Rear Panel RF GPIB and Increment Co
242. s to set the size of each step of the linear step sweep set the step size or set the number of steps 3 29 SWEEP FREQUENCY PANEL OPERATION LOCAL FRONT This error message is displayed when 1 the step sizevalueentered is greater than the sweep range 2 the number of steps entered results in step size of less than 1 kHz 0 1 Hz with Option 11 or 3 the sweep time entered divided by the number of steps entered results a dwell timeof 10 ms Entering valid values will dear the error OPERATION The step size range is 1 kHz 0 1 Hz with Option 11 tothe full frequency range of the instrument the number of steps range 15 1 to 10 000 If the step size does not divide into the frequency range the last step is truncated In logarithmic step sweep step size increases loga rithmically with frequency and is determined by a logarithmic curve fitted between the sweep start and stop frequencies and the number of steps The number of steps range is 1 to 10 000 The dwell time per step of the step sweep can be set for any time in the range of 1 ms to 99 sec When dwell ti me per step and step size or number of steps is set the sweep time equals dwell time per step times the number of steps plus the total phase locking time for all step frequencies If sweep time is set then dwell time per step is the result of the sweep time divided by the number of steps In this case the r
243. ss Edit to edit the selected frequency or enter a new frequency Press Output Freq to output the selected frequency This frequency is output until you select another frequency from the list and press Output Freq On the frequency list the output frequency selection is marked by a black square or if tagged an F high lighted in reverse video Return to the CW Frequency Control menu by pressing Previous Menu 3 23 LOCAL FRONT CW FREQUENCY PANEL OPERATION OPERATION Scanning Tagged F to the Tagged Frequencies menu below from the CW Fre quency Control menu press Tag Freq Menu This menu lets you select the tagged frequencies for output using the Scan Up and Scan Dn keys Return to the CW Frequency Control menu by pressing Previous Menu Selecting a Whilein the CW frequency mode you can edit the Power Level current CW frequency output power level or enter a new output power level Editing the Current Power Level Press Edit L1 to open the power level parameter then edit the current power level using the cursor control key or rotary data knob To close the open power level parameter press Edit 1 or make an other menu selection Entering a New Power Level Press Edit L1 to open the power level parameter then enter the new power level using the keypad and appropriate terminator key To close the open power level parameter press Edit 1 or make an other menu selection N
244. ssis Ground 13 16 DIO5 thru DIO6 Data Input Output Bits are HIGH when the data is logical 0 and LOW when the data is logical 1 17 REN Remote Enable A low true state enables bus instruments to be operated re motely when addressed FigureA 3 Pinout Diagram IEEE 488 GPIB Connector A 6 693XXB OM Appendix B Performance Specifications MODEL SUMMARY Model Frequency Range 69317B 0 01 to 8 4 GHz 69337B 2 0 to 20 0 GHz 69347B 0 01 to 20 0 GHz 69367B 0 01 to 40 0 GHz 69377B 0 01 to 50 0 GHz 69387B 0 01 to 60 0 GHz 69397B 0 01 to 65 0 GHz FREQUENCY CW MODE Output Twenty independent presettable CW frequencies FO F9 and MO M9 Accuracy Same as internal or external 10 MHz time base Internal Time Base Stability With Aging lt 2 x 10 9 day lt 5 x 10 day with Option 16 With Temperature 2 x 10 C over 0 C to 55 C 2 x 10 C with Option 16 Resolution 1 kHz 0 1 Hz with Option 11 External 10 MHz Reference Input Accepts external 10 MHz 100 Hz 10 to 20 dBm time base signal Auto matically disconnects the internal high stability time base option if installed BNC rear panel 502 impedance 10 MHz Reference Output 0 5 Vp p into 502 AC cou pled Rear panel BNC 50 impedance Switching Time typical maximum Units having a high end frequency of gt 20 GHz 40 ms to be within 1 kHz of final frequency Units having a high end frequency of 8 4 GHz g
245. stalled Press More to go tothe Second Additional Config ure GPIB menu for more selections Press Previous Menu to return to the main Config ure GPIB Menu display Second Additional Configure GPIB Menu When you press More the Second Additional Con figure GPIB Menu below is displayed 5663 Scalar Disabled S9T5STI Scalar Disabled This menu lets you select the following Scalar mode of operation with a Giga tronics Model 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer Scalar mode of operation with a Hewlett Packard M odel 8757D Scalar Network Ana lyzer Press 8003 Scalar to enable operations with a Giga tronics Model 8003 Scalar Network Analyzer Refer to paragraph 7 5 for procedures Press 8003 Scalar again to disable the operation Press 8757D Scalar to enable operations with a Hewlett Packard Model 8757D Scalar Network Ana lyzer Refer to paragraph 7 6 for procedures Press 8757D Scalar again to disable the operation Press Previous Menu to return to the First Addi tional Configure GPIB Menu display 3 103 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Setting Increment Sizes 3 104 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION The Increment menu lets you set the incremental size for editing frequency power level and time pa rameters When the increment mode is selected on these parameter values will increase or decrease by the set amount each time the or v pad is pressed or the rotary data knob is turned clockwise or counte
246. switch the 693XXB from OPERATE green LED on to STANDBY orange LED on NOTE During standby operation the fan runs continuously INSTALLATION 2 6 PREPARATION FOR USE Warmup Time From Standby When placing the 693XXB in op Operating Environment eration from stand by allow 30 minutes warmup to assure stable operation From a Cold Start 0 C The signal generator re quires approximately 120 hours 5 days of warm up to achieve specified frequency stability with aging NOTE Instruments disconnected from AC power for morethan 72 hours require 30 days to return to specified aging The 693XXB can be operated within the following environmental limits Temperature 0 C to 50 C Humidity 5 to 95 relative at 40 C Altitude up to 4600 meters Cooling Internal cooling is provided by forced airflow from the fan mounted on the rear panel Oooo CAUTION Before installing the 693XXB in its operating environment ensure that all airflow passages at the sides and rear of the instrument are clear This is of particular importance when ever the unit is being rack mounted Keep the cooling fan filter clean so that the ventilation holes are not obstructed A blocked fan filter can cause the instru ment to overheat and shut down 693XXB OM INSTALLATION 2 4 GPIB SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION 693XXB OM GPIB SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION The 693XXB provides automated microwave signal
247. t 15 ms to be within 1 kHz of final frequency 693XXB OM ANALOG SWEEP MODE Sweep Width Independently selected from 1 MHz to full range continuous sweep Accuracy The lessor of 30 MHz or 2 MHz 0 25 of sweep width for sweep speeds of 50 MHz ms Sweep Time Range 30 ms to 99 seconds PHASE LOCKED STEP SWEEP MODE Sweep Width Independently selected 1 kHz 0 1 Hz with Option 11 to full range Every frequency step in sweep range is phase locked Accuracy Same as internal or external 10 MHz time base Resolution Minimum Step Size 1 kHz 0 1 Hz with Option 11 Linear Log Sweep User selectable linear or log sweep In log sweep step size logarithmically increases with fre quency Steps User selectable number of steps or the step size Number of Steps Variable from 1 to 10 000 Step Size 1 kHz 0 1 Hz with Option 11 to the full fre quency range of the instrument If the step size does not divide into the selected frequency range the last step is truncated Dwell Time Per Step Variable from 1 ms to 99 seconds Fixed Rate Sweep Allows the user to set the total time of the sweep including lock time Variable from 20 ms to 99 seconds Switching Time typical maximum Units having a high end frequency of gt 20 GHz 15 ms 1 ms GHz step size or 40 ms whichever is less to be within 1 kHz of final frequecy Units having a high end frequency of 8 4 GHz 7 ms to be within 1 kHz of final frequency ALTERNATE SWEEP
248. t an Attenuator gt 40 dB below max power With an Attenuator gt 130 dB below max power POWER LEVEL SWITCHING TIME to within specified accuracy Without Change in Step Attenuator 3 ms typical With Change in Step Attenuator 20 ms typical With Change in Electronic Step Attenuator 3 ms typical Power level changes across 70 dB step will re sult in 20 ms delay ACCURACY AND FLATNESS Accuracy specifies the total worst case accuracy Flatness is included within the accuracy specification Step Sweep and CW Modes Attenuation Frequency Below GHz Max Power 0 01 20 20 40 40 50 50 60 60 65 Accuracy 0 25 dBA 1 0 dB 1 0 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 1 5 dB 25 60dB 1 0dB 1 0 dB 1 5 dB 23 5 dB4 N A gt 60 dB 1 0 dB 1 0 dB 2 5 dB 3 5 dBA N A Flatness 0 25 dBA 0 8 dB 0 8 dB 1 1 dB 1 1 dB 1 1 dB 25 60 dB 0 8dB 0 8 dB 1 1 dB 3 1 dBA N A gt 60 dB 0 8 dB 0 8 dB 2 1 dB 3 1 dB Typical 0 to 25 dB or to minimum rated power whichever is higher B 6 Analog Sweep Mode typical Attenuation Frequency Below GHz Max Power 0 01 0 05 0 05 20 20 40 40 65 Accuracy 0 12 dB 2 0 dB 2 0 dB 2 0 dB 3 0 dB 0 30 dB 3 5 dB 3 5 dB 4 6 dB 5 6 dB 30 60 dB 4 0 dB 4 0 dB 5 2 dB 6 2 dB 60 122 dB 5 0 dB 5 0 dB 6 2 dB 7 2 dB Flatness 0 12 dB 2 0 dB 1 0 dB 2 0 dB 3 0 dB 0 30 dB 3 5 dB 3 0 dB
249. t to GPIB address 19 and in the 8757D Scalar mode of operation to operate as a signal source for the SNA The following paragraphs describe how to set up the 693XXB to enablethe 8757D Scalar GPIB mode On the 693XXB front panel press LINE to place the signal generator in operation Allow the signal generator to warm up then press the EYE main menu key At the System Menu display press Config The System Configuration Menu below is displayed EC F1 2 888 mag B GHz Config Setups Secure At the System Configuration menu press GPIB The Configure GPIB Menu on the following page is displayed 7 21 USE WITH OTHER INSTRUMENTS 7 22 USE WITH A HP8757D SCALAR NETWORK ANALYZER JGFIB Terminator CRLF Le Config GFIE GPIB Address TEA Mode Press GPIB Address change the address of the 693XXB on the bus Enter 19 using the cursor con trol key or the data entry keypad and the termina tor key Hz ns ADRS The new GPIB address 19 will appear on the dis play Press More to gotothe First Additional Configure GPIB menu below Config GPIE Pur Meter Address 1 Pur Meter An ML4285 HRS Langage Native g At this menu press More to go to the Second Addi tional Configure GPIB menu below Config GPIE 56603 Scalar Disabled STITI Seslar Dizabled EUETCUTETUUENEGTCO H ULS oft Press 8757D Scalar to enable the 8757D Scalar GPIB m
250. ta is delimited on the GPIB by either the carriage return CR ASCII character or both the carriage re turn and linefeed CR LF ASCII characters Which character is used depends upon the requirements of the system controller Most modern controllers can use either CR or CR LF while many older control lers require one or the other Consult the controller s manual for its particular requirements From the Configure GPIB Menu display you can se lect which GPIB terminator to use by pressing the menu soft key Line Term This menu soft key tog gles the GPIB terminator between CR and CR LF The current selection appears on the display Series 693XXB Synthesized High Performance Sig nal Generators can be remotely operated via the GPIB using one of two external interface languages Native or SCPI Option 19 The Native interface language uses a set of 693XXB GPIB Product Spe cific commands to control the instrument the SCPI interface language uses a set of the Standard Com mands for Programmable Instruments commands to control the unit The Configure GPIB Menu has additional menu dis plays For instruments with Option 19 selection of which external interface language is to be used is made from the first additional menu F rom the Con figure GPIB Menu display you can access the first additional menu by pressing More The First Addi tional Configure GPIB Menu below is displayed Config GPIB Fur Meter Address 15 Fur Meter
251. tative or Anritsu Customer Service If either the shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs of stress notify the carrier as well as Anritsu Keep the shipping materials for the carrier s inspec tion 2 3 INSTALLATION 2 3 PREPARATION FOR USE PREPARATION FOR USE Preparation for use consists of checking that the rear panel line volt age selector switch is set for the correct line voltage and connecting the signal generator to the power source The following paragraphs provide these procedures along with information about power require ments warmup times and the operating environment Power Requirements The signal generator accepts 90 to 132 Vac and 180 to 264 Vac 48 to 440 Hz single phase power Power consumption is 400 VA maximum The signal gener ator is intended for Installation Category Overvolt age Category 11 CAUTION Before applying power verify that the unit is set to match the available line voltage and that the installed fuse is of the correct type and rating Line Voltage Selection The line voltage selector switch on the rear panel can be set for either 110 Vac or 220 Vac operation Figure 2 1 When the switch is set to 110 Vac the 693XXB accepts 90 to 132 Vac line voltage When the switch is set to 220 Vac the 693XXB accepts 180 to 264 Vac line voltage If the selector setting is in correct for the line voltage available change it to the corr
252. tep Size Dwell Time and Sweep Time 693XXB OM SWEEP FREQUENCY OPERATION In step sweep frequency mode the output frequency changes in discrete synthesized steps between selected start and stop frequencies Step sweeps can be from a low frequency toa high frequency or from a high frequency to low frequency Step sweeps can be selected to be linear or logarithmic Sweep width can be set from 1 kHz 0 1 Hz with Option 11 to the full frequency range of the instrument The step size or number of steps between the sweep start and stop frequency the dwell time per step the sweep time and the type of step sweep linear or logarithmic and sweep trigger are controllable from step sweep menus To place the 693XXB in step sweep frequency mode press the main menu key CW SWEEP SELECT At the resulting menu display press Step The Step Sweep Menu below is then displayed m2 Step Sweep This menu lets you perform the following Select a sweep range edit the sweep start and stop frequency parameters Gotothe sweep ramp menu set the dwell time per step set the step size or number of steps set the sweep time select log or linear sweep and select a sweep trigger Select an output power level for the sweep Gotothe alternate sweep menu In linear step sweep the sweep is linearly incre mented or decremented by the step size from the start frequency to the stop frequency There are two way
253. the power receptacle If not move to a working receptacle a If power is available go to the next step Step 3 Check the power cable If defective replace a If good call a service technician Signal Generator will not turn on OPERATE light is ON Normal Operation When the 693XXB is connected to the power source the OPERATE light should illuminate and the instrument should power up a If the OPERATE light illuminates but the unit fails to power up the 693XXB has an internal component failure Call a service technician 693XXB OM 6 13 OPERATOR MAINTENANCE TROUBLESHOOTING Table 6 4 Troubleshooting 2 of 3 Signal Generator Quits During Operation OPERATE light remains on Trouble Description The signal generator operates for some time then shuts down OPERATE light remains on After a short period the signal generator resumes normal operation This is an indication that the 693XXB has reached an excessive operating temperature Step1 Check that the fan is still operating during the time that the instrument is shut down Ifthe fan is still operating clean the air filter page 6 14 If the fan is not operating call a service technician 9 111101 is Displayed Trouble Description This message is displayed in the frequency pa rameters area to indicate that the output frequency is not phase locked It is normally caused by an internal component failure Step 1 P
254. the reference loop is not phase locked to the external 10 MHz reference The reference loop may phase lock to the internal 100 MHz time base consequently the 693XXB would continue to operate normally Error 110 The 100MHz Reference is not Locked to the High Stability 10MHz Crystal Oscillator Indicates the reference loop is not phase locked to the optional high stability 10 MHz crystal oscillator The reference loop may phase lock to the internal 100 MHz time base consequently the 693XXB would continue to operate normally Error 111 Fine Loop Osc 1 Failed Indicates fine loop oscillator 1 is not phase locked The 693XXB is still operable but the accuracy and stability of frequency outputs are greatly reduced 6 4 693XXB OM ERROR AND WARNING STATUS MESSAGES OPERATOR MAINTENANCE 6 1 Sdf Test Error Messages 2 of 4 Error Message Description Remarks Error 112 Coarse Loop B Osc Failed Indicates the coarse loop B oscillator is not phase locked The 693XXB is still oper able but the accuracy and stability of the frequency outputs are greatly reduced Error 113 Yig Loop Osc Failed Indicates the YIG loop is not phase locked The 693XXB is still operable but the accuracy and stability of the frequency outputs are greatly reduced Error 114 Down Converter LO not Locked Indicates the local oscillator in the down converter assembly is not phase locked The 693XXB is still operable but
255. tion Mode operat ing instructions 693XXB OM LOCAL OPERATIO MENU MAPS iss SELEC FREQUENCY CONTROL BEG SELECT CONTROL MODULATION SYSTEM 693XXB OM N SYSTEM CONFIGURATION Brightens The Display Refer to Chapter 3 paragraph 3 13 for System Configuration operating instructions Dims The Display Select 5V or 5V Level For Retrace and Bandswitch Blanking Select Normally Open or Closed Pen Lift Relay Contacts Select 5V or 5V level for Video Markers Select RF On or Off During Retrace Select RF On or Off During Frequency Switching In CW Step and List Modes _ Select Rest For Single Sweep 0 For Bottom of Sweep Ramp 10 For Top of Sweep Ramp Select RF On or Off at Reset Set Reference Multiplier Select 40 dB or 0 dB Attenuation When RF Switched Off Units With Option 2 Only Select GPIB Address Select CR or CR LF Line Terminator EE Terminator OF SS Mode On Off z GPIB um Config GPIB a GPIB Address 8003 Scalar Mode On Off HP8757D Scalar Mode On Off Set GPIB Address Select Power Meter Select Interface Language Option 19 Only Config GPIB Config GPIB Pur Meter Address 13 8003 Scalar Disabled L Pur Meter An ML48a3 TT mm 8757D Scalar Disabled Im Langu
256. tion waveforms delayed by pulse delay D1 at the internal pulse repetition rate Triggered The pulse generator is triggered by an external trigger to produce Single Doublet Triplet or Quadruplet pulse modulation waveforms Pulse de lay D1 is not available in this trigger mode Triggered w delay The pulse generator is triggered by an external trigger to produce Single Doublet Triplet or Quadruplet pulse modulation waveforms de layed by pulse delay D 1 Gated An external pulse gates the internal pulse generator on and off When gated on the pulse generator produces a Single pulse modulation waveform at the internal pulse repetition rate Doublet Triplet and Quadruplet pulse modes are not available in this trigger mode NOTE For proper operation the period of the external pulse must be greater than the sum of the pulse repetition rate and pulse width of the internal pulse modulation waveform To prevent relative timing jitter the external gating pulse source can be synchronized with the internal pulse generator by using the 10 MHz REF OUT signal output 693XXB rear panel as a frequency reference for the external generator Composite n this mode an external pulse triggers the internal pulse gener ator and also pulse modulates the RF output signal The internal pulse gener ator produces a Single pulse W1 delayed by pulse delay D1 which also pulse modulates the RF output signal This effectively sums the external and inte
257. to select it The M Status display will reflect your selection Press Previous Menu to return to the main Status Menu display External Source To provide phase modulation of the output signal us ing a modulating signal from an external source first setup the external signal generator and connect it to either the 693XXB front or rear panel FM M IN connector Next go to the additional M Status Menu page 3 83 and press Int Ext to select the external source for the modulating signal 3 65 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION ee ee ee oe EA Max Rate xxx MHz In units with Option 21B operating at frequencies from 10 MHz to lt 2 2 GHz this advisory message is displayed for all modes Max Rate the lesser of 10 MHz Narrow mode 1 MHz Wide mode or 103 of the maximum band frequency the current fre quency This error message is displayed when the external modulating signal exceeds the input voltage range gt 1 15V or lt 1 15V The message Reduce Input Level also appears at the bottom of the status display isturned off until the modulating signal is within the input voltage range This error message is displayed when the external actual de viation is set for gt 3 45 radians in Narrow mode or gt 460 radians n Wide mode The message Reduce Devi
258. tor or power meter is returned to the ALC circuitry The ALC adjusts the output power to keep the power level constant at the point of detection The external ALC source in put is selected from the leveling menu 3 61 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 62 LEVELING OPERATIONS Before going to the Leveling Menu from the ALC Mode menu select whether the external ALC signal is to be connected to the front or rear panel EXT ALC IN connector At the ALC Mode menu press Ext ALC Front to select front panel input or Ext ALC Rear to select rear panel input Now press Leveling Menu to goto the Leveling Menu below F1 Fz 20 060 Baba 19 ALC e Ere Next select the type of external sensor you are us ing to detect the output power To select the external ALC input from an external detector press External Detector To select the external ALC input from a power me ter press Power Meter After you have made the external ALC input con nection and selected the sensor type press ALC Loop The ALC Loop Menu below is dis played Analoga Sweep Fl 2 566 BEE Bee GHz Fz 28 880 mas Ba While monitoring the power level at the external de tection point first press Ext ALC Adj then use the cursor control key or rotary data knob to adjust the external ALC signal to obtain the set power level Toreturn to the Leveling Menu press ALC Mode then press Leveli
259. ts the recommended test equipment for performing the operation verification tests in this chapter Table 5 1 Recommended Test Equi pment T Recommended Instrument Critical Specification Manufacturer Model Frequency Range 0 01 to 65 GHz EIP Microwave Inc Models 538B Counter Input Z 50 548B or 578B with Resolution 1 Hz with Cable Kit Other External Time Base Cable Kit Option 590 and Input and External Mixer External Mixer Option 91 26 5 to 40 GHz Option 92 40 to 60 GHz Option 93 60 to 90 GHz Power Meter Range 30 to 20 dBm Anritsu Models ML2437A or ML2438A with 1uW to 100 mW with Power Power Sensors Sensors MA2474A 0 01 to 40 GHz MA2475A 0 01 to 50 GHz Oscilloscope Bandwidth DC to 150 MHz Tektronix Inc Model TAS485 Vertical Sensitivity 2 mV division Horiz Sensitivity 50 ns division Tables 5 2 and 5 3 contain test record forms that can be copied and used to record the results of operational verification testing of your 693XXB Thesetables are included as part of the operational verifica tion test procedures and contain test information for all 693XXB mod els 5 3 OPERATION VERIFICATION 5 4 INITIAL CHECKOUT INITIAL 692XXB 693XXB CHECKOUT Before starting the operation verification tests in this chapter perform an initial checkout of the 693XXB to be tested This initial checkout consists of applying power to the signal generator verifying th
260. tween the signal generator and the control ler This interconnection is via a standard GPIB cable The Anritsu Part number for such a cable is 2000 1 2 or 4 1 2 or 4 meters in length The default GPIB address is 5 If a different GPIB address is desired it can be set from the front panel using the Configure GPIB Menu To change the GPIB address first press the front panel main menu key labeled The Sys tem Menu shown on the following page is dis played 2 7 INSTALLATION 2 8 GPIB SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION Ch Fi 2 268 GEG Bee B GHz Now press the menu soft key Config The System Configuration Menu below is displayed 0 06 dEm eo iDHA rn To goto the Configure GPIB menu from this menu press the menu soft key GPIB The Configure GPIB Menu below is displayed J GFIBE Terminator CRLF um Config GPIE E GPIB Address qe 25 __ _ _ DENEN WLS fj H Press the menu soft key GPIB Address to change the current GPIB address of the signal generator Enter a new address using the cursor control key or the data entry keypad and the terminator key Hz ns ADRS The new GPIB address will now appear on the dis play The entry must be between 1 and 30 to be rec ognized as a valid GPIB address 693XXB OM INSTALLATION Selecting the Line Terminator Selecting the Interface Language 693XXB OM GPIB SETUP AND INTERCONNECTION Da
261. uency 224 le Vm Eum nomm c CONTROL ES It Gurren Main Menu Power Level s Key Cursor Preset Parameter Soft Keys Appearance Changes To Show Current Selection Output Next r Tagged Frequency Output Previous Tagged Frequency Edit Current Power Level Note In Most Cases Pressing a Menu Soft Key That Controls a Menu Function Turns The Function ON pressing the Key Again Turns The Function OFF The Key Labels Change Appearance to Show the ON OFF Condition Figure 4 1 Sample Menu Map Annotated 4 5 CW SWEE SELECT CONTROL LEVEL ALC SELECT LEVEL CONTROL mmm x CW SWEE 8 SELECT REQUENC CONTROL LEVEL ALC SELECT LEVEL CONTROL lODULATIO SYSTEM LOCAL OPERATION MENU MAPS CW FREQUENCY MODE Copy Current Frequency and Power to List Index gram Set Slave DF Frequency Set Slave Main Power Level Set Slave Alternate Power Level Master Slave On Off Edit Current Power Level On Off Set The Sweep Time es Fa 3 588 666 GHz L1 8 00 dBm Edit Current Tag Untag Highlighted Frequency Frequency Edit Highlighted Frequency Output Highlighted Edit Current Frequency Power Level Output Next Tagged Frequency Output Previous Tagged Frequency Edit Current Power Level Edit Highlighted Frequency
262. uracy and Flatness Test Record 21 of 27 Model 69367B w Option 15B Serial No Date Model 69367B with Option 15B High Power without Option 2B Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 1 0 GHz CW Frequency 5 0 GHz CW Frequency 25 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 13 dBm dBm 13 dBm dBm 6dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 5dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 4dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 3dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 9dBm dBm 2dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 8dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 0 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 6 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 6dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB 0 01 to 20 GHz 8 2 dB 20 to 40 GHz typical not a specification 693XXB OM 5 39 OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Power Leve Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 22 of 27 Model 69367B w Option 15B Serial
263. utput signals at an opera tor selectable frequency offset One instrument the Master controls the other the Slave via interface cables between their rear panel AUX and SERIAL I O connectors The two units are phase locked to gether by connecting them to the same 10 MHz reference time base E Co c a RF OUTPUT in OUTPUT 69XXXA B or 68XXXB C 69XXXA B or 68XXXB C Master Slave TO DUT TO DUT Figure 7 1 69XXXA B and or 68XXXB C Configuration for Master Slave Operation Connecting Connect the two instruments shown in Figure 7 1 the I nstru as follows Be eee een eee ee eects ments NOTES Connec the 3 port AUX 1 0 cable end When connecting two instruments labeled MASTER to the rear panel AUX together for Master Slave opera connector the Master instrument tions always use an Anritsu Connect the AUX I O cable labeled Master Slave interface cable set SLAVE to the rear panel AUX I O con Part No ND36329 nector on the Slave instrument f a Model 56100A Scalar Network Analyzer is being used with the Step 2 Connect the ends of the flat interface ca Master Slaveconfiguration 1 con ble to the rear panel Serial I O connectors nect the AUX I O cable end la
264. vere or fatal electric shock WARNING Before changing the fuse always remove the power cord from the power outlet There is the risk of receiving a fatal electric shock if the fuse is replaced with the power cord con nected Always use a new fuse of the type and rating specified by the fuse markings on the rear panel of the instrument WARNING There are no operator serviceable components inside Refer servicing of the instrument to qualified service technicians To prevent the risk of electrical shock or damage to precision components do not remove the equipment covers WARNING Use two more people to lift and move this equipment or gt 18 kg use an equipment cart There is a risk of back injury if this equipment is lifted by one person If the equipment is used in manner not specified by the manufacturer the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired Safety 2 693XXB OM Table of Contents Chapter 1 General Information 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 7 1 8 1 9 SCOPE OF MANUAL 1 3 INTRODUCTION 43 x ud aed 8 1 3 DESCRIPTION 4 uum 1 3 IDENTIFICATION NUMBER 1 5 ELECTRONIC MANUAL 1 5 RELATED MANUALS 1 5 GPIB Programming Manual 1 5 SCPI Programming Manual 1 5 Maintenance Manual 1
265. wer Output Adds high power RF compo nents to the instrument providing increased RF output power in the 2 20 GHz frequency range Option 15B is standard in models hav ing a high end frequency that is gt 40 GHz Option 16 High Stability Time Base Adds an ovenized 10 MHz crystal oscillator with lt 5 x 10 day frequency stability Option 17 No Front Panel Deletes the front pane for usein re mote control applications where a front panel display or keyboard control are not needed Option 18 mmWave Module Bias Output Provides bias output for 54000 xWRxx Millimeter Wave Source Modules BNC Twinax connector rear panel Option 19 SCPI Programmability Adds GPIB command mne monics complying with Standard Commands for Programmable In struments Version 1993 0 SCPI programming complies with IEEE 488 2 1987 Option 21B Digital Down Converter Replaces the standard Analog Down Converter 0 01 to 2 0 GHz with a Digital Down Con verter 0 01 to 2 2 2 Option 22 0 01 to 10 0 MHz Audio Frequency Adds frequency coverage below 10 MHz In models having a high end frequency of x20 GHz rated output power is reduced by 1 dB in models having a high end frequency of 220 GHz rated output power is reduced by 2dB 1 7 GENERAL INFORMATION 1 8 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS 1 9 RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT RECOMMENDED TEST EQUIPMENT Series 693XXB Synthesized High Performance Signal Generator per formance spe
266. wise to increase or de crease the value of the parameter by the unit size Turning the knob rapidly changes the value of the parameter in larger steps Using a Set Increment When editing frequency power level and time pa rameters you can increase or decrease the parame ter s value by a set amount each timethe 4 or v pad is pressed or the rotary data knob is turned clock wise or counter clockwise For instructions on set ting the increment size refer to paragraph 3 13 Now try changing the current value of the CW fre quency displayed on your instrument from 2 0 GHz to 6 395 GHz Use both the cursor control key s a and v pads and the rotary data knob to make the value changes When you are finished your menu display should look similar to the example below F1 6 595 BEG 88 d GHz To close the open parameter when you are finished editing press Edit F1 or make another menu selec tion 3 19 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION Entering a New Value Clear Back Entry space Terminator Key ey Keys M CLEA ENTR 92 55 GHz ec dam 7 8 9 MHz ms kHz 5 STEPS Hz 0 2 ADRS Keypad 3 20 ENTERING DATA To change the current value of a parameter by en tering a new value for the parameter use the data entry keypad and termination keys As soon as you press one of the keys on the data entry keypad the cur
267. with Option 2C Step Attenuator Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy Power Level Accuracy CW Frequency 5 0 GHz CW Frequency 25 0 GHz CW Frequency 45 0 GHz Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power Set Power Measured Power 8 5 dBm dBm 0dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 7 5 dBm dBm 1 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 6 5 dBm dBm 2 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 5 5 dBm dBm 3 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 4 5 dBm dBm 4 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 3 5 dBm dBm 5 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 2 5 dBm dBm 6 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 1 5 dBm dBm 7 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 0 5 dBm dBm 8 dBm dBm 9 dBm dBm 0 5 dBm 9 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 1 5 dBm dBm 10 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 2 5 dBm dBm 11 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 3 5 dBm dBm 12 dBm dBm 13 dBm dBm Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 0 dB Specification is 1 5 dB Power Level Flatness Step Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 1 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 1 6 dB 0 01 to 40 GHz 2 2 dB 40 to 50 GHz Power Level Flatness Analog Sweep Set Power Max Power Min Power Variation 1 dBm dBm dBm dB Maximum variation is 6 0 dB 0 01 to 20 GHz 8 2 dB 20 to 40 GHz 10 2 dB 40 to 50 GHz typical not a specification 5 42 693XXB OM OPERATION POWER LEVEL ACCURACY VERIFICATION AND FLATNESS TESTS Table 5 3 Powe Levd Accuracy and Flatness Test Record 25 of 27 Model 69387B
268. y 4 9 4 6 List Sweep Frequency ModeMenuMap 4 10 4 7 Fixed Power Leve ModeMenuMap 4 11 4 8 CW Power Sweep Mode Menu 4 12 4 9 Sweep Frequency Step Power Mode Menu Map 4 13 4 10 LevelingModesMenuMap 4 14 4 11 Amplitude Modulation ModeMenuMap 4 15 4 12 Frequency Modulation Mode Menu Map 4 16 4 13 Phase Modulation ModeMenuMap 4 17 4 14 Pulse Modulation Mode Menu Map 4 18 4 15 System Configuration Menu 4 19 4 3 4 4 LOCAL OPERATION MENU MAPS 693XXB OM SAMPLE MENU MAP Main Menu Key Cursor Indicates The Active Main Menu Key Points To The Menu Displayed Whenever The Menu Soft Key Is Depressed Menu Display Functional Description A Main Fini Menu Soft Key Edit Current Frequency Copy Current Frequency and Power to List Index REQUENC CONTROL Main EES To Master Slave Menu gt Menu Not Shown Keys Edit Current H m Power Level Baa nb CW Ramp On Off Sweep Time 6 056 Sec Cii SetThe Sweep Time Indicates That Pressing This Main Menu Key While In The Current Mode Displays The Mode Soft Keys Parameter Control Menu Appearance Changes To Show Current Selection Edit Current Tag Untag Highlighted Frequency Frequency Edit Highlighted Freq
269. y noted on thetest record for the model being tested d Press Edit L1 to open the current power level parameter for editing NOTE Set L1 to the power level noted the In models with Option 22 that have test a high end frequency of 520 GHz Step 2 rated output power is reduced by 1dB In models with Option 22 that have a high end frequency of 220 GHz rated output power is re duced by 2 dB stepa Measure the output power level with the Power Meter and record the reading on the test record Verify that the Power Meter reading meets the specifications stated on the test record Step4 SetL1tothe next test power level Re cord the Power Meter reading on the test record Step 5 Repeat step 4 for the other levels listed on the test record for the current CW fre quency Step 6 Repeat steps 1 thru 5 for all CW frequen cies listed on the test record 5 14 693XXB OM OPERATION VERIFICATION Power Level Flatness Test Procedure 693XXB OM POWER LEVEL ACCURACY AND FLATNESS TESTS Power level flatness is checked by measuring the power level variation during a full band sweep first in the step sweep mode then in the analog sweep mode Step 1 Set up the 693XXB as follows for a step sweep power level flatness test a Reset the instrument by pressing BAHN then Reset The CW Menu is displayed b Press Step to place the instrument in the step sweep frequency mode a
270. ypad provides for entering fre quency power level time and number of steps parameters and GPIB address values The key functions as a change sign key during any keypad entry CLEAR ENTRY Key When a parameter is open for editing the CLEAR ENTRY key is used to clear the parameter entry BACK SPACE Key The BACK SPACE key is used to correct keypad data entry errors by deleting the last number or decimal point entered Terminator Keys The terminator keys are used to terminate keypad data entries and change the parameter values in memory If the entered valueis outsidethe allow able range of the open parameter an error message will be displayed along with an audible beep The terminator keys are as follows GHz Sec dBm MHz ms dB kHz us STEPS Hz ns ADRS 3 13 LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 3 5 INSTRUMENT START UP INSTRUMENT START UP Now that you have familiarized yourself with the layout of the signal generator s front pane controls and data display you are ready to be gin operating the instrument Begin by powering it up Powering Up the 693XXB Start Up Display Standby Operation LEVEL CONTROL MODULATION SYSTEM OPERATE LINE STANDBY Line Key 3 14 Connect the 693XXB to an ac power source by fol lowing the procedure in the Installation chapter This automatically places the instrument in operation front panel OPERATE LED on
271. zetime will be applied as an increment or a decrement as appropriate During pulse modulation when the stepped delay mode is on both Start Delay and End Delay times are error checked as Delay 1 D1 times in the usual manner against the other pulse parameters Step Size time is checked against the Start Delay and End Delay times and must be no greater than the difference between Start Delay and End Delay 3 94 693XXB OM LOCAL FRONT PANEL OPERATION 693XXB OM SIGNAL MODULATION External Pulse Source To provide pulse modulation of the output signal using a modulating signal from an external source first set up the external pulse generator and connect it to either the 693XXB front or rear panel PULSE TRIGGER IN connector Next go to the additional Internal Pulse Status Menu page 3 89 and press Internal External to select the external source for the modulating signal The External Pulse Status Menu below is then dis played This menu contains the external pulse status win down that shows the current menu selections This menu lets you perform the following Turn pulse modulation on and off Select the modulating signal source Select the polarity of the signal Low or High that turns the RF on Select the input connector front panel or rear panel PULSE TRIGGER IN that is connected to the external pulse source Press Off to turn pulse modulation on and off The External Pulse statu

to view the Anritsu 69367B datasheet.

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents